Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 1.
Explain the phenomenon of adsorption with the help of examples.
Answer:
Consider the following two examples:

  • Example 1: When a metal spoon is dipped in milk and taken out, it is observed that a film of milk particles covers the spoon surface.
  • Example 2: If a cold water bottle is taken out from the refrigerator and kept on a table for a while, water vapour is seen to condense on the outer surface of the bottle, forming droplets or a film.
  • In the above examples, the milk particles or the water molecules from the air get adsorbed on the surface of the spoon and the bottle, respectively.
  • Similarly, surfaces of many objects around us are exposed to the atmosphere. Water molecules as well as other gas molecules such as N2, O2, from the air form an invisible multimolecular film on these objects.
    This is known as the phenomenon of adsorption.

Question 2.
Why does adsorption occur?
Answer:

  • The adsorption phenomenon is caused by dispersion forces (also known as London dispersion forces or van der Waals forces) which are short range and additive. Adsorption force is the sum of all interactions between all the atoms.
  • The pulling interactions cause the surface of a liquid to tighten like an elastic film.
  • A measure of the elastic force at the surface of a liquid is called surface tension.
  • There is a tendency to have minimum surface tension, i.e., decrease of free energy, which leads to adsorption.

Question 3.
Define surface tension.
Answer:
A measure of the elastic force at the surface of a liquid is called surface tension.
OR
Surface tension is the amount of energy required to stretch or increase the surface of a liquid by a unit area.

Question 4.
Define the following terms.
i. Adsorbent
ii. Adsorbate
Answer:
i. Adsorbent: The material or substance present in the bulk, on the surface of which adsorption takes place is called adsorbent.
ii. Adsorbate: The substance getting adsorbed on the adsorbent is called as adsorbate.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 5.
Give some examples of adsorption.
Answer:
Following are some examples of adsorption:

  • Adsorption of gases like hydrogen and oxygen by finely divided metals, namely, platinum, palladium, copper, nickel, etc.
  • Adsorption of gases like nitrogen and carbon dioxide by activated charcoal.
  • Removal of colouring matter like an organic dye, for example, methylene blue. When charcoal is added to methylene blue solution and shaken, it becomes colourless after some time as dye molecules accumulate on the surface of charcoal.

Question 6.
What is desorption?
Answer:
The process of removal of an adsorbed substance from a surface on which it was adsorbed is called desorption.

Question 7.
Define sorption.
Answer:
When both adsorption and absorption occur simultaneously, it is known as sorption.
e.g. When a chalk is dipped in ink, the ink molecules are adsorbed at the surface of the chalk while the solvent of the ink goes deeper into the chalk due to absorption.

Question 8.
What is physisorption? State its characteristics.
Answer:
When the adsorbent such as gas molecules are accumulated at the surface of a solid on account of weak van der Waals forces, the adsorption is termed as physical adsorption or physisorption.

Characteristics:

  • The van der Waals forces involved in physical adsorption are similar to forces causing condensation of gas into liquid. Thus, heat is released in physisorption.
  • The heat released during physisorption is of the same order of magnitude as heat of condensation.
  • Due to weak nature of van der Waals forces, physisorption is weak in nature.
  • The adsorbed gas forms several layers of molecules at high pressures.
  • The extent of adsorption is large at low temperatures.
  • The equilibrium is attained rapidly.
  • Physisorption is readily reversed by lowering of pressure of gas or by raising temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 9.
Define chemisorption, Write its main features.
Answer:
When the gas molecules accumulate at the surface of a solid or adsorbate by means of chemical bonds (covalent or ionic), the adsorption is termed as chemical adsorption or chemisorption.
Features of chemical adsorption:

  • Chemisorption is specific in nature.
  • Chemisorption involving the gas-solid as the adsorbate and adsorbent is usually exothermic i.e., heat is released during this process (Exception: The adsorption of hydrogen on glass is endothermic).
  • The heat evolved in chemisorption per mole of adsorbate is nearly the same order of magnitude as that accompanying chemical bonding.
  • Chemisorption involves a large energy of activation and hence, it is also referred as activated adsorption.
  • Chemisorption increases with increase in temperature in the beginning, as a greater number of molecules can have activation energy. But after certain temperature chemisorption decreases with increase in temperature as the chemical bonds break.
  • Sometimes at low’ temperature, physisorption occurs which passes into chemisorption as the temperature is raised.
  • Chemisorption is dependent on surface area of the adsorbent.

[Note: Chemisorption was first investigated in 1916 by American Chemist, Irving Langmuir (1881-1957).]

Question 10.
Why is chemisorption also known as activated adsorption?
Answer:
Chemisorption involves a large energy of activation and hence, it is also referred as activated adsorption.

Question 11.
Give reason: Adsorption of hydrogen on glass is an endothermic process.
Answer:
Adsorption of hydrogen on glass is an endothermic process because heat is absorbed during the process due to dissociation of hydrogen.

Question 12.
Explain graphically the effect of the following factors on the adsorption of gases by solids.
i. Temperature of the adsorbent surface
ii. Pressure of the gas (adsorbate)
Answer:
i. Temperature of the adsorbent surface:

  • Adsorption is an exothermic process.
  • According to Te Chatelier’s principle, it is favoured at low temperature.
  • Therefore, the amount of gas adsorbed is inversely proportional to the temperature.
  • The graph given below shows plots of volume of N? adsorbed per unit mass of adsorbent against the pressure of a gas at different temperatures.
  • As temperature increases from 193 K to 273 K at a constant pressure ‘P’, the amount of gas adsorbed decreases.

ii. Pressure of the gas:

  • At any temperature, the extent of gas adsorbed increases with an increase in pressure.
  • The extent of adsorption is directly proportional to pressure of the gas.
  • At high pressures extent of adsorption becomes independent of the pressure. The surface of adsorbent is then almost fully covered by adsorbed gaseous molecules.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 1

Question 13.
What are the applications of adsorption?
Answer:
Following are the various applications of adsorption:
i. Catalysis (Heterogeneous catalysis):

  • The solid catalysts are used in many industrial manufacturing processes.
  • For example, iron is used as a catalyst in manufacturing of ammonia, platinum in manufacturing of sulphuric acid, H2SO4 (by contact process) while finely divided nickel is employed as a catalyst in hydrogenation of oils.

ii. Gas masks:

  • It is a device which consists of activated charcoal or mixture of adsorbents.
  • It is used for breathing in coal mines to avoid inhaling of the poisonous gases.

iii. Control of humidity: Silica and alumina gels are good adsorbents of moisture.

iv. Production of high vacuum:

  • Lowering of temperature at a given pressure, increases the rate of adsorption of gases on charcoal powder. By using this principle, high vacuum can be attained by adsorption.
  • A vessel evacuated by vacuum pump is connected to another vessel containing coconut charcoal cooled by liquid air. The charcoal adsorbs the remaining traces of air or moisture to create a high vacuum.

v. Adsorption indicators: The adsorption is used to detect the end point of precipitation titrations. Dyes such as eosin, fluorescein are used as indicators.
e.g.
a. A solution of sodium chloride containing a small amount of fluorescein is titrated against silver nitrate solution.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 2
b. When chloride ions are over, fluorescein is adsorbed on white silver chloride precipitate and hence, red colour is developed.
c. Thus, colour changes from pale yellow to reddish pink at the end point.

vi. Separation of inert gases:

  • In a mixture of noble gases, different gases adsorb to different extent.
  • Due to selective adsorption principle, gases can be separated on coconut charcoal.

vii. Froth floatation process:

  • A low-grade sulphide ore is concentrated by separating it from silica and other earthy matter using pine oil as frothing agent.
  • Hydrophobic pine oil preferentially adsorbs sulphide ore which is taken up in the froth.

viii. Chromatographic analysis:

  • It is based on selective adsorption of ions from solution using powdered adsorbents such as silica or alumina gel.
  • It has several industrial and analytical applications. Other applications include surface area determination, purification of water, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 14.
Explain how high vacuum can be obtained by adsorption.
Answer:

  • Lowering of temperature at a given pressure, increases the rate of adsorption of gases on charcoal powder. By using this principle, high vacuum can be attained by adsorption.
  • A vessel evacuated by vacuum pump is connected to another vessel containing coconut charcoal cooled by liquid air. The charcoal adsorbs the remaining traces of air or moisture to create a high vacuum.

Question 15.
State whether TRUE or FALSE. Correct if false.
i. The rate of adsorption of gases on charcoal powder decreases on lowering of temperature at a given pressure.
ii. Noble gases can be separated from their mixture using the principle of selective adsorption as they adsorb to different extent.
iii. Pine oil is used as frothing agent in froth floatation process.
Answer:
i. False
The rate of adsorption of gases on charcoal powder increases on lowering of temperature at a given pressure.
ii. True
iii. True

Question 16.
Match the following.

Column A Column B
i. Iron a. Hydrogenation of oils
ii. Nickel b. Production of sulphuric acid
iii. Platinum c. Synthesis of ammonia

Answer:
i – c,
ii – a,
iii – b

Question 17.
What is a catalyst?
Answer:
A catalyst is a substance which when added to a reacting system, increases the rate of a reaction without itself undergoing any permanent chemical change.

Question 18.
Explain the importance of catalysts in chemical industries.
Answer:

  • A large number of the chemicals manufactured in industries make use of catalysts to obtain specific products.
  • The use of catalyst lowers the reaction temperature as well as energy costs significantly.
    Due to these advantages, catalysts are of great importance in chemical industry.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 19.
Name two types of catalysis.
Answer:

  1. Homogeneous catalysis
  2. Heterogeneous catalysis

Question 20.
Define homogeneous catalysis and give any two examples.
Answer:
When the reactants and the catalyst are in the same phase, it is said to be homogeneous catalysis.
e.g.
i. Iodide ion (I) is used as homogeneous catalyst in decomposition of aqueous hydrogen peroxide because both I and H2O2 are present in the same aqueous phase.
ii. Hydrolysis of sugar is catalysed by H+ ions furnished by sulphuric acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 3
All reactants and catalyst are in same solution phase.
[Note: Enzyme catalysis is also an important type of homogeneous catalysis.]

Question 21.
Justify: Lead chamber process is an example of homogeneous catalysis.
Answer:
i. In the lead chamber process, sulphur dioxide is oxidized to sulphur trioxide with dioxygen (O2) in the presence of nitric oxide as catalyst.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 4
ii. Since all the reactants as well as the catalyst is present in gaseous state. i.e., in same phase, it is a homogeneous catalysis reaction.
Hence, lead chamber process is an example of homogeneous catalysis.

Question 22.
Describe heterogeneous catalysis with the help of one example.
Answer:
i. When the reactants and catalyst are in different phase, it is said to be heterogeneous catalysis.
ii. The heterogeneous catalyst is generally a solid and the reactants may either be gases or liquids.
iii. When the solid catalyst is added to the reaction mixture, it does not dissolve in the reacting system and the reaction occurs on the surface of the solid catalyst.
e.g. Dinitrogen (N2) and dihydrogen (H2) combine to form ammonia in Haber process in the presence of finely divided iron along with K2O and Al2O3.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 5
b. In the above reaction, Al2O3 and K2O are promoters of the Fe catalyst. Al2O3 is added to prevent the fusion of Fe particles. K2O causes chemisorption of nitrogen atoms. Molybdenum is also used as promoter.
c. Since the reactants are present in gaseous phase while the catalyst used is in solid phase, it represents heterogeneous catalysis.

Question 23.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 6
i. State whether the given reaction is an example of heterogeneous or homogeneous catalysis.
ii. What is the role of Fe, K2O and Al2O3 in this reaction?
Answer:
i. This reaction is an example of heterogeneous catalysis.
ii. Fe is used as a catalyst while K2O and Al2O3 are promoters of the Fe catalyst. Al2O3 is used to prevent the fusion of Fe particles while K2O causes chemisorption of nitrogen atoms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 24.
Describe hydrogenation reaction of vegetable oils.
Answer:
i. Hydrogenation reaction of vegetable oils used in food industry to produce solid fats. The reaction is as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 7
ii. The reaction is catalysed by finely divided metals like Ni, Pd or Pt.
iii. Vegetable oil contains one or more carbon-carbon double bonds (C = C) in its structure.
iv. On hydrogenation, a solid product (which contains only carbon-carbon single bonds) is formed. It is called Vanaspati ghee.
v. The hydrogenation reaction of vegetable oils is an example of heterogeneous catalysis as the reactant and the catalyst are not present in the same phase.

Question 25.
i. Explain the role of catalytic converters in automobile exhaust.
ii. Why do automobiles with catalytic converter require unleaded petrol?
Answer:
i. a. An important application of heterogeneous catalysts is in automobile catalytic converters.
b. In automobile exhaust, large number of air pollutants such as carbon monoxide, nitric oxide, etc. are present.
c. The catalytic converter transforms these air pollutants into carbon dioxide, water, nitrogen and oxygen.
ii. The catalyst used in the catalytic converter gets poisoned by the adsorption of lead (Pb) present in the petrol. Hence, the automobiles with catalytic converter requires unleaded petrol.

Question 26.
What are inhibitors? Explain with an example.
Answer:
Inhibitors are substances that decreases the rate of chemical reactions.
e.g. Chloroform forms poisonous substance, carbonyl chloride, by air oxidation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 8
When 2% ethanol is added to chloroform, the formation of COCl2 is suppressed because ethanol acts as an inhibitor and retards the above reaction.
[Note: Chloroform was earlier used as an anaesthetic.]

Question 27.
Write decomposition reaction of hydrogen peroxide. Suggest how this decomposition can be prevented.
Answer:
i. Hydrogen peroxide decomposes as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 9
ii. The reaction can be inhibited by addition of dilute acid or glycerol as they act as inhibitors.

Question 28.
Explain why 2% ethanol is added to chloroform?
Answer:
Inhibitors are substances that decreases the rate of chemical reactions.
e.g. Chloroform forms poisonous substance, carbonyl chloride, by air oxidation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 10
When 2% ethanol is added to chloroform, the formation of COCl2 is suppressed because ethanol acts as an inhibitor and retards the above reaction.
[Note: Chloroform was earlier used as an anaesthetic.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 29.
Describe the steps involved in heterogeneous catalysis by solid catalyst.
OR
Explain the mechanism involved in catalytic action of a heterogeneous catalyst.
Answer:
The catalytic action of a heterogeneous catalyst occurs on the surface of a catalyst.
The mechanism involves the following five steps.
i. Diffusion of reactants towards the surface of the catalyst.
ii. Adsorption of reactant molecules on the surface of the catalyst.
iii. Occurrence of chemical reaction on the catalyst surface and formation of an intermediate.
iv. Formation of the products.
v. Desorption of reaction products from the catalyst surface. Products leave the catalyst surface in the following steps.
Steps involved in desorption of reaction products:
Diffusion → Adsorption → Intermediate formation → Product formation → Desorption
vi. Fresh reactant molecules can replace the products to start the cycle again as in first step.
vii. This is why catalyst remains unchanged in mass and chemical composition at the end of the reaction.

Question 30.
Write a short note on catalytic activity.
Answer:

  • The catalytic activity of a catalyst depends on the strength of chemisorption.
  • If large number of reactant molecules (gas or liquid) are strongly adsorbed on the surface of solid catalyst, the catalyst is said to be active.
  • However, the adsorption of reactant molecules on the surface, that is, the bond formed between adsorbate and adsorbent surface should not be very strong so that they are not immobilized.
  • d-block metals such as Fe, V and Cr tend to be strongly active towards O2, C2H2, C2H4, CO, H2, CO2, N2, etc.
  • Mn and Cu are unable to adsorb N2 and CO2.
  • The metals Mg and Li adsorb O2 selectively.

Question 31.
Explain catalytic selectivity with suitable examples.
Answer:
i. Some solid catalysts are selective in their action.
ii. The same gaseous reactants produce different products when different catalysts are used.
e.g.
a. The gaseous ethylene and O2 react to produce different products with different catalysts.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 11

b. The gaseous carbon monoxide and H2 produce different products by using different catalysts.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 12

Question 32.
i. What are zeolites?
ii. Zeolites are shape selective catalysts. Explain.
iii. What is the use of a zeolite catalyst ZSM-5 in petroleum industry?
Answer:
i. a. Zeolites are aluminosilicates with three-dimensional network of silicates.
b. Some silicon atoms in this network are replaced by aluminium atoms giving Al – O – Si framework which results in microporous structure.

ii. a. The reactions in zeolites are dependent on the size and shape of reactant or products, b. It also depends on the pores and cavities of zeolites.
b. Therefore, zeolites are shape selective catalysts.

iii. In petroleum industry, zeolite catalyst ZSM-5 converts alcohols directly to gasoline (petrol) by dehydration which gives a mixture of hydrocarbons.

Question 33.
State the importance of colloids in day-to-day life.
Answer:

  • Colloid chemistry is the chemistry of everyday life.
  • A number of substances we use in our day-to-day life are colloids. For example, milk, butter, jelly, whipped cream, mayonnaise.
  • Knowledge of colloid chemistry is essential for understanding about many useful materials like cement, bricks, pottery, porcelain, glass, enamels, oils, lacquers, rubber, celluloid and other plastics, leather, paper, textiles, filaments, crayons, inks, road construction material, etc.
  • In many daily processes like cooking, washing, dyeing, painting, ore floatation, water purification, sewage disposal, smoke prevention, photography, pharmacy, use of colloids is important.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 34.
What are colloids? Explain.
Answer:
i. Colloids are heterogeneous mixtures.
ii. The component of colloid present in the largest proportion is called dispersion medium and the other components are called dispersed phase.
iii. The particles of the dispersed phase are larger than the size of a molecule and smaller than the particles which we can see with naked eye.
e.g.

  • Observe the formation of solution of salt and water. Salt dissolves completely in water and forms homogeneous system.
  • On the other hand, ground coffee or tea leaves with milk form suspension.
  • Between the two extremes of solution and suspension exists a large group of systems called colloidal dispersions or simply colloids.

Question 35.
State the differences between colloids and solutions.
Answer:
Colloids:

  1. Colloids contain particles of dispersed phase with diameters in the range of 2 to 500 nm.
  2. They are translucent to light.
  3. e.g. Milk, fog, etc.

Solutions:

  1. Solutions contain solute particles with diameters in the range of 0.1 to 2 nm.
  2. They are transparent or may be coloured.
  3. e.g. NaCl solution

Question 36.
Explain: Natural phenomena of colloids observed in daily life.
Answer:
Following are some examples of colloids observed in daily life.
i. Blue colour of the sky: The sky appears blue to us because minute dust particles along with minute water droplets dispersed in air scatter blue light which reaches our eyes.
ii. Blood: It is a colloidal dispersion of plasma proteins and antibodies in water arid at the same time blood is also a suspension of blood cells and platelets in water.
iii. Soils: Fertile soils are colloidal in nature where humus acts as a protective colloid. Soil adsorbs moisture and nourishing materials due to its colloidal nature.
iv. Fog, mist and rain:

  • Mist is caused by small droplets of water dispersed in air.
  • Fog is formed whenever there is temperature difference between ground and air.
  • A large portion of air containing dust particles gets cooled below its dew point, the moisture from the air condenses on the surface of these particles which form fine droplets, which are colloidal particles and float in the air as fog or mist.

Question 37.
State different ways to classify colloids.
Answer:
Colloids can be classified in three different ways:

  • Physical states of dispersed phase and dispersion medium
  • Interaction or affinity of phases
  • Molecular size

Question 38.
Name the types of colloids based on the physical states of dispersed phase and dispersion medium. Give two examples of each.
Answer:
There are eight types of colloids based on the physical states of dispersed phase and dispersion medium as given below.

Sr. No. Type of Colloids Examples
i. Solid sol (solid dispersed in solid) Coloured glasses, gemstones
ii. Sols and gels (solid in liquid) Gelatin, muddy water
iii. Aerosol (solid in gas) Smoke, dust
iv. Gel (liquid in solid) Cheese, jellies
v. Emulsion (liquid in liquid) Milk, hair cream
vi. Aerosol (liquid in gas) Fog, mist
vii. Solid sol (gas in solid) Foam rubber, plaster
viii. Foam (gas in liquid) Froth, soap lather

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 39.
Complete the following chart.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 13
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 14
[Note: Students can write any one example of the given type of colloids.]

Note: Types of colloids based on the physical states of dispersed phase and dispersion medium.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 15

Question 40.
Describe classification of colloids based on the interaction or affinity of phases.
Answer:
On the basis of interaction or affinity of phases, a colloidal solution is classified as lyophilic and lyophobic.
i. Lyophilic colloids:

  • A colloidal solution in which the particles of dispersed phase have a great affinity for the dispersion medium are lyophilic colloids.
  • If the lyophilic sol is evaporated, the dispersed phase separates. However, if it is remixed with the medium, the sol. can be formed again and hence, such sols are called reversible sols.
  • They are stable and difficult to coagulate.

ii. Lyophobic colloids:

  • Colloidal solution in which the particles of the dispersed phase have no affinity for the dispersion
    medium are called lyophobic colloids.
  • The common examples are Ag, Au, hydroxides like Al(OH)3, Fe(OH)3, metal sulphides.
  • Once precipitated or coagulated they have little tendency or no tendency to revert back to colloidal state.

[Note: Lyo means liquid and philic means loving whereas phobic means fearing and hence liquid hating. If water is the dispersion medium, the terms hydrophilic and hydrophobic are used.]

Question 41.
Give reason: Lyophilic sols are called reversible sols.
Answer:

  • When lyophilic sol is evaporated, the dispersed phase separates.
  • However, if the dispersed phase is remixed with the medium, the sol can be formed again.

Hence, lyophilic sols are called reversible sols.

Question 42.
How are colloids classified based on their molecular size?
Answer:
Colloids are classified into three types based on their molecular size as described below.
i. Multimolecular colloids:

  • In multimolecular colloids, the individual particles consist of an aggregate of atoms or small molecules with size less than 103 pm.
    e.g. Gold sol consists of particles of various sizes having several gold atoms.
  • Colloidal solution in which particles are held together with van der Waals force of attraction is called multimolecular colloid.
    e.g. S8 sulphur molecules

ii. Macromolecular colloids: In this type of colloids, the molecules of the dispersed phase are sufficiently large in size (macro) to be of colloidal dimensions.
e.g. Starch, cellulose, proteins, polythene, nylon, plastics.

iii. Associated colloids or micelles:

  • The substances behave as normal electrolytes at low concentration and associated in higher concentration forming a colloidal solution.
  • The associated particles are called micelles, e.g. Soaps and detergents

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 43.
How can be colloids prepared by chemical methods?
Answer:
i. Colloidal dispersions can be prepared by chemical reactions leading to formation of molecules by double decomposition, oxidation, reduction or hydrolysis.
ii. Molecules formed in these reactions are water-insoluble and thus, they aggregate leading to the formation of colloids.
e.g.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 16

Question 44.
Describe the process involved in peptization?
Answer:

  • During peptization a precipitate is converted into colloidal sol by shaking with dispersion medium in the presence of a small amount of an electrolyte. The electrolyte used is known as peptizing agent.
  • During the process, the precipitate adsorbs one of the ions of the electrolyte on its surface and as a result, positive or negative charge is developed on the precipitate which finally breaks up into small particles of colloidal size.

[Note: This method is generally applied to convert a freshly prepared precipitate into a colloidal sol.]

Question 45.
Why is it necessary to purify colloidal solutions?
Answer:

  • Colloidal solution generally contains excessive amount of electrolytes and some other soluble impurities.
  • A small quantity of an electrolyte is necessary for the stability of colloidal solution, however, a large quantity of electrolyte may result in coagulation.
  • It is also necessary to reduce soluble impurities.

Hence, it is necessary to purify colloidal solutions.

Question 46.
i. What is purification of colloidal solution?
ii. How can a colloidal solution be purified using the method of dialysis?
Answer:
i. The process used for reducing the amount of impurities to a requisite minimum is known as purification of colloidal solution.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 17

ii. a. Dialysis is a process of removing a dissolved substance from a colloidal solution by diffusion through a suitable membrane.
b. Purification of colloidal solution can be carried out using dialysis by the following method.

  • The apparatus used is dialyser.
  • A bag of suitable membrane containing the colloidal solution is suspended in a vessel through which fresh water is continuously flowing.
  • The molecules and ions diffuse through membrane into the outer water and pure colloidal solution is left behind.

Question 47.
What are the general properties exhibited by colloidal dispersions?
Answer:
General properties exhibited by colloidal dispersions:

  • Colloidal system is heterogeneous and consists of two phases, dispersed phase and dispersion medium.
  • The dispersed phase particles pass slowly through parchment paper or animal membrane, but readily pass through ordinary filter paper.
  • Colloidal particles are usually not detectable by powerful microscope.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 48.
Discuss the factors that influence the colour of colloidal solutions.
Answer:

  • Colour of colloidal solution depends on the wavelength of light scattered by dispersed particles.
  • The colour of colloidal dispersion also changes with the manner in which the observer receives the light.
    e.g. Mixture of a few drops of milk and large amount of water appears blue when viewed by the scattered light and red when viewed by transmitted light.
  • It also depends on size of colloidal particles.
    e.g. Finest gold sol is red in colour whereas with increase in size it appears purple.

Question 49.
Give three examples each:
i. Positively charged sols
ii. Negatively charged sols
Answer:
i. Positively charged sols: Al2O3. xH2O, haemoglobin, TiO2 sol
ii. Negatively charged sols: Au sols, Congo red sol, clay

Note: Some common sols with the nature of charge on the particles are listed in the table below.

Positively charged sols Negatively charged sols
Hydrated metallic oxides: Al2O3.xH2O, CrO3.xH2O, Fe2O3.xH2O. Metals: Cu, Ag. Au sols

Metallic sulphides: As2S3, Sb2S3, CdS

Basic dye stuff, methylene blue sols Acid dye stuff, eosin, Congo red sol
Haemoglobin (blood) Sols of starch, gum
Oxides: TiO2 sol Gelatin, clay, gum sols

Question 50.
Explain the term electroosmosis.
Answer:

  • Movement of dispersed particles can be prevented by suitable means such as use of membrane.
  • On doing so, it is observed that the dispersion medium begins to move in an electric field. This is known as electroosmosis.

Question 51.
What is coagulation?
Answer:
The precipitation of colloids by removal of charge associated with colloidal particles is called coagulation.

Question 52.
How can we bring about precipitation of lyophobic colloids?
Answer:

  • The charge on the colloidal particles is due to the preferential adsorption of ions on their surface.
  • Hence, lyophobic colloids can be precipitated out by removing the charge on the colloidal particles (dispersed phase).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 53.
Discuss various methods that are used to bring about coagulation of lyophobic sols.
Answer:
Coagulation of the lyophobic sols can be carried out in the following ways.

  • By electrophoresis: The colloidal particles move towards oppositely charged electrodes, get discharged and precipitate.
  • By mixing two oppositely charged sols: Oppositely charged sols when mixed in almost equal proportions neutralize their charges and get precipitated.
    e. g. Mixing of hydrated ferric oxide (positive sol) and arsenious sulphide (negative sol) brings them in the precipitated forms. This type of coagulation is called mutual coagulation.
  • By boiling: When a sol is boiled, the adsorbed layer is disturbed as a result of increased collisions with molecules in the dispersion medium. This reduces charge on the particles and subsequently particles settle down as a precipitate.
  • By persistent dialysis: On prolonged dialysis, traces of the electrolyte present in the sol are removed almost completely. The colloids then become unstable and finally precipitate.
  • By addition of electrolytes: When excess of an electrolyte is added, the colloidal particles are precipitated.

Question 54.
Write Hardy-Schulze rule.
Answer:
Generally, greater the valency of the flocculating ion added, greater is its power to cause precipitation. This is known as Hardy-Schulze rule.

Question 55.
Differentiate between oil in water and water in oil emulsions.
Answer:
Oil in water:

  1. Oil is the dispersed phase and water is the dispersion medium.
  2. If water is added, it will be miscible with the emulsion.
  3. Addition of small amount of an electrolyte makes the emulsion conducting.
  4. Continuous phase is water.
  5. Basic metal sulphates, water soluble alkali metal soaps are used as emulsifiers.

Water in oil:

  1. Water is the dispersed phase and oil is the dispersion medium.
  2. If oil is added, it will be miscible with the emulsion.
  3. Addition of small amount of an electrolyte has no effect on conducting power.
  4. Continuous phase is oil.
  5. Water insoluble soaps such as those of Zn, Al, Fe, alkaline earth metals are used as emulsifiers.

Question 56.
What are the properties of emulsion?
Answer:
Properties of emulsion:

  • Emulsion can be diluted with any amount of the dispersion medium. On the other hand, the dispersed liquid when mixed forms a separate layer.
  • The droplets in emulsions are often negatively charged and can be precipitated by electrolytes.
  • Emulsions show Brownian movement and Tyndall effect.
  • The two liquids in emulsions can be separated by heating, freezing, centrifuging, etc.

Question 57.
Give applications of colloids.
Answer:
Applications of colloids:
i. Electrical precipitation of smoke:

  • Smoke is a colloidal solution of solid particles of carbon, arsenic compound, dust, etc. in the air.
  • When smoke is allowed to pass through chamber containing charged plates, smoke particles lose their charge and get precipitated. The particles then settle down on the floor of the chamber.
  • The precipitator used is called Cottrell precipitator.

ii. Purification of drinking water:

  • Water obtained from natural sources contains colloidal impurities.
  • By addition of alum to such water, colloidal impurities get coagulated and settle down. This makes water potable.

iii. Medicines:

  • Usually medicines are colloidal in nature.
  • Colloidal medicines are more effective owing to large surface area to volume ratio of a colloidal particle and easy assimilation.
    e.g. Argyrol is a silver sol used as an eye lotion. Milk of magnesia, an emulsion is used in stomach disorders.

iv. Rubber industry: Rubber is obtained by coagulation of latex.
v. Cleansing action of soaps and detergents.
vi. Photographic plates, films, and industrial products like paints, inks, synthetic plastics, rubber, graphite lubricants, cement, etc. are colloids.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

Question 58.
Match column A with column B.

Column A Column B
i. Tyndall effect i. Kinetic property
ii. Electrophoresis ii. Argyrol
iii. Silver sol iii. Optical property
iv. Brownian motion iv. Coagulation

Answer:
i – c,
ii – d,
iii – b,
iv – a

Question 59.
In drinking water treatment, often alum is added for the complete removal of suspended impurities. On complete dissolution, alum produces positive charge which neutralizes the charge on the suspended particles and thus, impurities are easily removed.
i. Name and define the process involved due to which charge on particles get neutralized.
ii. What is the role of alum in the above mentioned process?
Answer:
i. a. Charge on particles get neutralized due to coagulation.
b. The precipitation of colloids by removal of charge associated with colloidal particles is called coagulation.
ii. Alum acts as a reagent that helps in coagulation of the suspended particles by the removal of the charge associated with these particles.

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which of the following is responsible for adsorption phenomenon?
(A) Hydrogen bonding
(R) Dipole-dipole forces
(C) Ion-dipole forces
(D) Dispersion forces
Answer:
(D) Dispersion forces

2. A substance which adsorbs another substance on its surface is called ……………..
(A) adsorbate
(B) absorbate
(C) adsorbent
(D) absorbent
Answer:
(C) adsorbent

3. During adsorption, the molecules of the substance which gets adsorbed are termed as
(A) adsorbent
(B) adsorbate
(C) absorbent
(D) absorbate
Answer:
(B) adsorbate

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

4. in adsorption of acetic acid on charcoal, acetic acid is ……………
(A) adsorhate
(B) adsorbent
(C) absorbent
(D) absorbate
Answer:
(A) adsorhate

5. The process of removal of an adsorbed substance from the surface is known as
(A) sorption
(B) oxidation
(C) reduction
(D) desorption
Answer:
(D) desorption

6. ………….. is the process in which adsorbate molecules are held on the surface of the adsorbent by weak van der Waals forces.
(A) Chemisorption
(B) Absorption
(C) Physisorption
(D) Biosorption
Answer:
(C) Physisorption

7. Which of the following is an example of physical adsorption?
(A) Adsorption of acetic acid in solution by charcoal
(B) Adsorption of O2 on tungsten
(C) Adsorption of N2 on Fe
(D) Adsorption of H2 on Ni
Answer:
(A) Adsorption of acetic acid in solution by charcoal

8. Chemisorption is a slow process because …………….
(A) it forms multimolecular layer
(B) it is reversible
(C) it takes place at normal temperature
(D) it requires high activation energy
Answer:
(D) it requires high activation energy

9. The number of layer(s) formed on adsorbent in chemical adsorption is …………….
(A) one
(B) two
(C) three
(D) many
Answer:
(A) one

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

10. Which of the following statements is CORRECT regarding chemical adsorption?
(A) It is highly specific in nature.
(B) It is relatively strong.
(C) It involves the formation of monolayer of adsorbed particles.
(D) All of these.
Answer:
(D) All of these.

11. Which of the following is adsorbed to maximum extent on charcoal?
(A) H2
(B) N2
(C) Cl2
(D) O2
Answer:
(C) Cl2

12. The relation between the amount of substance adsorbed by an adsorbent and the equilibrium pressure or …………. at any constant temperature is called adsorption isotherm.
(A) surface area
(B) volume
(C) circumference
(D) concentration
Answer:
(D) concentration

13. For equilibrium pressure (P), the mass of gas adsorbed (x) and mass of adsorbent (m) may be expressed as Freundlich adsorption isotherm as ……………
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids 18
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{m}}=\mathrm{kP}^{\frac{1}{\mathrm{n}}}\)

14. When log x/m is plotted against log P, the intercept obtained …………..
(A) on Y axis is equal to log K
(B) on Y axis is equal to K
(C) on X axis is equal to log K
(D) on X axis is equal to K
Answer:
(A) on Y axis is equal to log K

15. The adsorption isotherm tends to saturate at ………….. pressure.
(A) low
(B) moderate
(C) all of these
(D) high
Answer:
(D) high

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

16. In Haber process for manufacture of NH3, the catalyst used is ……………
(A) iron
(B) copper
(C) vanadium pentoxide
(D) nickel
Answer:
(A) iron

17. A substance that decreases the rate of a chemical reaction is called ……………
(A) inhibitor
(B) prohibitor
(C) promoter
(D) reactor
Answer:
(A) inhibitor

18. Whether a given mixture forms a true solution or a colloidal dispersion depends on the …………….
(A) charge of solute particles
(B) size of solvent particles
(C) size of solute particles
(D) charge of solvent particles
Answer:
(C) size of solute particles

19. An aerosol is a dispersion of a ……………
(A) gas in a solid
(B) liquid in a gas
(C) solid in a gas
(D) both (B) and (C)
Answer:
(D) both (B) and (C)

20. The dispersed phase in Pumice stone is ……………
(A) solid
(B) liquid
(C) gas
(D) none of these
Answer:
(C) gas

21. Colloidal solution in which the dispersed phase has little affinity for the dispersion medium is called ………………
(A) lyophobic colloids
(B) lyophilic colloids
(C) hydrophilic colloids
(D) emulsions
Answer:
(A) lyophobic colloids

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

22. Which of the following is NOT an example of macromolecular colloid?
(A) Starch
(B) Proteins
(C) S8 molecules
(D) Nylon
Answer:
(C) S8 molecules

23. Tyndall effect is useful ……………….
(A) to identify colloidal dispersions
(B) to count number of particles in colloidal dispersion.
(C) to determine the size of the colloidal particles
(D) all of these
Answer:
(D) all of these

24. Brownian movement is a ……………… type of property of the colloidal sol.
(A) electrical
(B) optical
(C) kinetic
(D) colligative
Answer:
(C) kinetic

25. The migration of colloidal particles under the influence of an electric field is called …………….
(A) catalysis
(B) Brownian movement
(C) electrophoresis
(D) Tyndall effect
Answer:
(C) electrophoresis

26. The capacity of an ion to coagulate a colloidal solution depends on ……………….
(A) its shape
(B) its valency
(C) the sign of charge
(D) both (B) and (C)
Answer:
(D) both (B) and (C)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 11 Adsorption and Colloids

27. ……………… is an example of water in oil type of emulsion.
(A) Milk
(B) Cod liver oil
(C) Vanishing cream
(D) Paint
Answer:
(B) Cod liver oil

28. Which of the following has highest precipitation power to precipitate negative sol?
(A) Al3+
(B) Mg2+
(C) Na+
(D) K+
Answer:
(A) Al3+

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 1.
Explain irreversible reaction.
Answer:
Irreversible reaction:
i. Reactions which occur only in one direction, namely, from reactant to products are called irreversible reactions.
ii. They proceed in only a single direction until one of the reactants is exhausted.
iii. The direction in which an irreversible reaction occurs is indicated by an arrow (→) pointing towards the products in the chemical equation.
e.g. a. \(\mathrm{C}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \stackrel{\text { Burn }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CO}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)
b. \(2 \mathrm{KClO}_{3(\mathrm{~s})} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{KCl}_{(\mathrm{s})}+3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\)

Question 2.
What is a closed system?
Answer:
A system in which there is no exchange of matter with the surroundings is called a closed system.

Question 3.
What is an open system?
Answer:
A system in which exchange of both matter and heat occurs with the surroundings is called an open system.

Question 4.
Why was calcium oxide used in theatre lighting?
Answer:
Calcium oxide (CaO) on strong heating glows with a bright white light. Hence, CaO was used in theatre lighting, which gave rise to the phrase ‘in the limelight’.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 5.
Explain liquid-vapour equilibrium with an example.
Answer:
Liquid-vapour equilibrium:
i. Consider reversible physical process of evaporation of liquid water into water vapour in a closed vessel. Initially, there is practically no water vapour in the vessel.

ii. When the liquid evaporates in the closed container, the liquid molecules escape from the liquid surface into vapour phase building up vapour pressure. They also condense back into liquid state because the container is closed.

iii. In the beginning the rate of evaporation is high and the rate of condensation is low. But with time, as more and more vapour is formed, the rate of evaporation goes down and the rate of condensation increases. Eventually the two rates become equal. This gives rise to a constant vapour pressure. This state is known as an ‘equilibrium state’.
In this state, the rate of evaporation is equal to the rate of condensation.
It may be represented as: H2O(l) ⇌ H2O(Vapour)

iv. At equilibrium, the pressure exerted by the gaseous water molecules at a given temperature remains constant, known as the equilibrium vapour pressure of water (or saturated vapour pressure of water or aqueous tension). The saturated vapour pressure increases with increase of temperature.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 1
[Note: The saturated vapour pressure of water at 100 °C is 1 atm (1.013 bar). Hence, water boils at 100 °C when pressure is 1 atm.]

Question 6.
What is meant by the term ‘normal boiling point’ of a liquid?
Answer:
For any pure liquid at 1 atm pressure, the temperature at which its saturated vapour pressure equals to atmospheric pressure is called the normal boiling point of that liquid.
e.g. The boiling point of ethyl alcohol is 78 °C i.e., the saturated vapour pressure of ethyl alcohol at 78 °C is 1 atm (1.013 bar).

Question 7.
Give an example of solid-liquid equilibrium.
Answer:
A mixture of ice and water in a perfectly insulated thermos flask at 273 K is an example of solid-liquid equilibrium.
H2O(s) ⇌ H2O(l)

Question 8.
Identify the type of equilibrium in the following physical processes:
i. Camphor(s) ⇌ Camphor(g)
ii. Ammonium chloride(s) ⇌ Ammonium chloride(g)
iii. Carbon dioxide gas ⇌ Dry ice
iv. Water ⇌ Ice
Answer:
i. Solid – vapour equilibrium
ii. Solid – vapour equilibrium Solid
iii. Solid – vapour equilibrium
iv. Solid – liquid equilibrium

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 9.
Name two substances that undergoes sublimation.
Answer:
Camphor, ammonium chloride.

Question 10.
Write a short note on chemical equilibrium.
Answer:
Chemical equilibrium:

  • If a reaction takes place in a closed system so that the products and reactants cannot escape, we often find that reaction does not give a 100% yield of products. Instead some reactants remain after the concentrations stop changing.
  • When there is no further change in concentration of reactant and product, the chemical reaction has attained equilibrium, with the rates of forward and reverse reactions being equal.
  • Chemical equilibrium at a given temperature is characterized by constancy of measurable properties such as pressure, concentration, density, etc.
  • Chemical equilibrium can be approached from either side of the chemical reaction.

Question 11.
Explain the law of mass action and give its mathematical representation.
Answer:
Statement: The law of mass action states that the rate of a chemical reaction at each instant is proportional to the product of concentrations of all the reactants.
Explanation: A rate equation can be written for a reaction by applying the law of mass action as follows: Consider a reaction, A + B → C
Here A and B are the reactants and C is the product. The concentrations of chemical species are expressed in mol L-1 and denoted by putting the formula in square brackets. On applying the law of mass action to this
reaction, a proportionality expression can be written as: Rate ∝ [A] [B]
This proportionality expression is transformed into an equation by introducing a proportionality constant, k, as follows:
Rate = k [A] [B]
This equation is called the rate equation and the proportionality constant, k, is called the rate constant of the reaction.

Question 12.
Write the rate equation for the following reactions:
i. C + O2 → CO2
ii. 2KClO3 → 2KCl + 3O2
Answer:
The rate equation is written by applying the law of mass action.
i. The reactants are C and O2
Rate ∝ [C] [O2]
∴ Rate = k [C] [O2]
ii. The reactant is KClO3 and its 2 molecules appear in the balanced equation.
∴ Rate ∝ [KClO3]2
∴ Rate = k [KClO3]2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 13.
Derive the expression of equilibrium constant, KC for the reaction:
A + B ⇌ C + D
Answer:
Consider a hypothetical reversible reaction A + B ⇌ C + D.
Two reactions, namely, forward and reverse reactions occur simultaneously in a reversible chemical reaction. The rate equations for the forward and reverse reactions are:
Rateforward ∝ [A][B]
∴ Rateforward = kf [A] [B] …… (1)
∴ Ratereverse ∝ [C] [D]
∴ Ratereverse = kr [C] [D] …. (2)
At equilibrium, the rates of forward and reverse reactions are equal. Thus,
Rateforward = Ratereverse
∴ kf [A] [B] = kr [C] [D]
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{k}_{\mathrm{f}}}{\mathrm{k}_{\mathrm{r}}}=\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{C}}=\frac{[\mathrm{C}][\mathrm{D}]}{[\mathrm{A}][\mathrm{B}]}\) …….. (3)
KC is called the equilibrium constant.

Question 14.
Show that the equilibrium constant of the reverse chemical reaction (KC) is the reciprocal of the equilibrium constant (KC).
Answer:
Consider a reversible chemical reaction:
aA + bB ⇌ cC + dD
The equilibrium constant, KC = \(\frac{[C]^{c}[D]^{d}}{[A]^{a}[B]^{b}}\)
Consider the reverse reaction:
cC + dD ⇌ aA + bB.
The equilibrium constant, KC is:
KC = \(\frac{[\mathrm{A}]^{a}[\mathrm{~B}]^{\mathrm{b}}}{[\mathrm{C}]^{\mathrm{c}}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{d}}}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{C}}}\)
Thus, equilibrium constant of the reverse chemical reaction (KC) is the reciprocal of the equilibrium constant KC.

Question 15.
Write equilibrium constant expressions for both forward and reverse reaction for the synthesis of ammonia by the Haber process.
Answer:
Synthesis of ammonia by Haber process:
N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 2

Question 16.
How are the equilibrium constants of the following pair of equilibrium reactions related?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 3
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 4
ii. KC = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{CO}_{2}\right]\left[\mathrm{N}_{2}\right]}{[\mathrm{CO}]\left[\mathrm{N}_{2} \mathrm{O}\right]}\)

Question 17.
Write KP expression for the reaction:
aA(g) + bB(g) ⇌ cC(g) + dD(g)
Answer:
For the given reaction,
KP = \(\frac{\left(P_{c}\right)^{c}\left(P_{D}\right)^{d}}{\left(P_{A}\right)^{a}\left(P_{B}\right)^{b}}\)

Question 18.
N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g)
Write expressions for KP and substitute expressions for PN2, PH2 and PNH3 using ideal gas equation.
Answer:
For the given reaction, KP = \(\frac{\left(P_{N H_{3}}\right)^{2}}{\left(P_{N_{2}}\right)\left(P_{H_{2}}\right)^{3}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 5
[Note: The above question is modified to apply appropriate textual context, i. e., to indicate that students need to use ideal gas equation to derive expressions for PN2, PH2 and PNH3]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 19.
For a chemical equilibrium reaction
H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g),
write an expression for KP (and relate it to KC).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 6

Question 20.
Write the relationship between KC and KP for the following equilibria:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 7
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 8
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 9

Question 21.
Write the expressions for KC and KP and the relationship between them for the equilibrium reaction,
2A(g) + B(g) ⇌ 3C(g) + 2D(g)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 10

Question 22.
Explain in short homogeneous equilibrium and heterogeneous equilibrium.
Answer:
i. In a homogeneous equilibrium, the reactants and products are in the same phase.
e.g. Dissociation of HI:
2HI(g) ⇌ H2(g) + I2(g)
ii. In a heterogeneous equilibrium, the reactants and products exist in different phases, e.g. Formation of NH4Cl:
NH3(g) + HCl(g) ⇌ NH4Cl(s)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 23.
The unit of KC is different for different reactions. Explain this statement with suitable examples.
Answer:
Unit of equilibrium constant:
i. The unit of equilibrium constant depends upon the expression of KC which is different for different equilibria. Therefore, the unit of KC is also different for different reactions.
ii. Consider the following equilibrium reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 11

iii. Consider the following equilibrium reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 12

Question 24.
Write the equilibrium constant expression for the decomposition of baking soda. Deduce the unit of KC from the above expression.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 13

[Note: Considering gaseous reactants and products, in this reaction, Δn = 2 – 0 = 2
∴ Units of KC = (mol dm-3)Δn
= (mol dm-3)2
= mol2 dm-6
Thus, the units of the above reaction is mol2 dm-6.]

Question 25.
What are the characteristics of equilibrium constant?
Answer:
Characteristics of equilibrium constant:

  • The value of equilibrium constant is independent of initial concentrations of either the reactants or products.
  • Equilibrium constant is temperature dependent. Hence, KC and KP change with change in temperature.
  • Equilibrium constant has a characteristic value for a particular reversible reaction represented by a balanced equation at a given temperature.
  • Higher value of KC or KP means more concentration of products is formed and the equilibrium point is more towards right hand side and vice versa.

Question 26.
Explain how equilibrium constant helps in predicting the direction of the reaction.
Answer:
Prediction of the direction of the reaction:
i. For the reaction, aA + bB ⇌ cC + dD,
The equilibrium constant (KC) is given as:
KC = \(\frac{[C]^{c}[D]^{d}}{[A]^{a}[B]^{b}}\)
where, all the concentrations are equilibrium concentrations.
ii. When the reaction is not necessarily at equilibrium, the concentration ratio is called QC i.e.,
QC = \(\frac{[C]^{c}[D]^{d}}{[A]^{a}[B]^{b}}\)
iii. By comparing QC with KC for a reaction under given conditions, we can decide whether the forward or the reverse reaction should occur to establish the equilibrium.
a. QC < KC: The reaction will proceed from left to right, in forward direction, generating more product to attain the equilibrium.
b. QC > KC: The reaction will proceed from right to left, removing product to attain the equilibrium.
c. QC = KC: The reaction is at equilibrium and no net reaction occurs.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 14
[Note: The prediction of the direction of the reaction on the basis of QC and KC values makes no comment on the time required for attaining the equilibrium.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 27.
Explain how KC can be used to know the extent of the reaction?
Answer:
Extent of the reaction: The equilibrium constant expression indicates that the magnitude of KC is:
i. directly proportional to the concentrations of the products.
ii. inversely proportional to the concentrations of the reactants.
a. Value of KC is very high (KC > 103):
At equilibrium, there is a high proportion of products compared to reactants.
Forward reaction is favoured.
Reaction is in favour of products and nearly goes to completion.

b. Value of KC is very low (KC < 10-3):
At equilibrium, only a small fraction of the reactants is converted into products.
Reverse reaction is favoured.
Reaction hardly proceeds towards the products.

c. Value of KC is in the range of 10-3 to 103:
Appreciable concentrations of both reactants and products are present at equilibrium.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 15

Question 28.
For the following reactions, write KC expressions and predict direction of the reactions based on the magnitude of their equilibrium constants.
i. 2H2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2H2O(g), KC = 2.4 × 1047 at 500 K
ii. 2H2O(g) ⇌ 2H2(g) + O2(g), KC = 4.2 × 10-48 at 500 K
Answer:
i. a. KC expression:
KC = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})}\right]^{2}}{\left[\left[\mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\right]\right]^{2}\left[\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\right]}\)
b. For the reaction, KC = 2.4 × 1047 at 500 K
If the value of KC >>> 103, forward reaction is favoured.
Hence, the given reaction will proceed in the forward direction and will nearly go to completion.

ii. a. KC expression:
KC = \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\right]^{2}\left[\mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}\right]}{\left[\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(\mathrm{g})}\right]^{2}}\)
b. For the reaction, KC = 4.2 × 10-48 at 500 K
If the value of KC <<< 10-3, reverse reaction is favoured.
Hence, the given reaction will proceed in the backward direction and will nearly go to completion.

Question 29.
Describe how equilibrium constant can be used to calculate the composition of an equilibrium mixture.
Answer:
An equilibrium constant can be used to calculate the composition of an equilibrium mixture.
Consider an equilibrium reaction, A(aq) + B(aq) ⇌ C(aq) + D(aq)
The equilibrium constant is 4.0 at a certain temperature.
Let the initial amount of A and B be 2.0 mol in ‘V’ litres. Let x mol be the equilibrium amount of C.
Hence, we can construct a table as shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 16
The expression for equilibrium constant can be written as:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 17
Substituting the value of equilibrium concentration, we get
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 18
Therefore, equilibrium concentrations are 0.67 mol of A, 0.67 mol of B, 1.33 mol of C and 1.33 mol of D in V litres.

Question 30.
Explain the link between chemical equilibrium and chemical kinetics:
Answer:
Equilibrium constant (KC) is related to rate or velocity constants of forward reaction (kf) and reverse reaction (kr) as:
KC = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}_{\mathrm{f}}}{\mathrm{k}_{\mathrm{r}}}\)
This equation can be used to determine the composition of the reaction mixture
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 19
[Note: The equilibrium refers to the relative amounts of reactants and products and thus a shift in equilibrium in a particular direction will imply the reaction in that direction will be favoured.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 31.
Equal concentrations of hydrogen and iodine are mixed together in a closed container at 700 K and allowed to come to equilibrium. If the concentration of HI at equilibrium is 0.85 mol dm-3, what are the equilibrium concentrations of H2 and I2 if KC = 54 at this temperature?
Solution:
Given: [HI(g)] = 0.85 mol dm-3
KC = 54 at 700 K
Equilibrium concentrations of H2 and I2
Formula: KC = \(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{\mathrm{c}}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{d}}}{[\mathrm{A}]^{\mathrm{a}}[\mathrm{B}]^{\mathrm{b}}}\)
Balanced chemical reaction: 2HI(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 20
Equilibrium concentration of I2(g) = Equilibrium concentration of H2(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 21
Ans: Equilibrium concentrations of H2 and I2 are equal to 0.12 mol dm-3.

Question 32.
Calculate Kc at 500 K for the reaction,
2HI(g) ⇌ H2(g) + I2(g) if the equilibrium concentrations are [HI] = 0.5 M, [H2] = 0.08 M and [I2] = 0.062 M.
Solution:
Given: T = 500 K,
At equilibrium, [HI] = 0.5 M, [H2] = 0.08 M, [I2] = 0.062 M.
To find: Equilibrium constant KC
Formula: KC = \(\frac{[C]^{c}[D]^{d}}{[A]^{a}[B]^{b}}\)
Calculation: The above equilibrium reaction is given as 2HI(g) ⇌ H2(g) + I2(g)
The expression of KC is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 22
Ans: KC at 500 K for the given reaction is 0.0198.

Question 33.
Calculate KC and KP for the reaction at 295 K, N2O4 ⇌ 2NO2(g) if the equilibrium concentrations are [N2O4] = 0.75 M and [NO2] = 0.062 M, R = 0.08206 L atm K-1 mol-1.
Solution:
Given: R = 0.08206 L atm K-1 mol-1, T = 295 K
At equilibrium , [N2O4] = 0.75 M, [NO2] = 0.062 M
To find: Equilibrium constants, KP and KC
Formulae: i. KC = \(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]^{\mathrm{c}}[\mathrm{D}]^{\mathrm{d}}}{[\mathrm{A}]^{\mathrm{a}}[\mathrm{B}]^{\mathrm{b}}}\)
ii. KP = KC (RT)Δn
Calculation : The equilibrium reaction is given as N2O4(g) ⇌ 2NO2(g)
The expression of KC is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 23
KP is related to KC by expression: KP = KC (RT)Δn
where, Δn = numbers of moles of gaseous products – number of moles of gaseous reactants
= 2 – 1 = 1
∴ KP = KC(RT)1
∴ KP = 5.13 × 10-3 × 0.08206 × 295
∴ KP= 123.9 × 10-3 = 0.124
Ans: KC and KP for the reaction at 295 K are 5.13 × 10-3 and 0.124 respectively.

Question 34.
The equilibrium constant KC for the reaction of hydrogen with iodine is 54.0 at 700 K.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 24
KC = 54.0 at 700 K
If kf is the rate constant for the formation of HI and kr is the rate constant for the decomposition of HI, deduce whether kr is larger or smaller than kr.
ii. If the value of kr at 700 K is 1.16 × 10-3, what is the value of kf ?
Solution:
Given: i. KC = 54.0 at 700 K
ii. kr = 1.16 × 10-3 at 700 K
To find: i. Whether kf is larger or smaller than kr.
ii. Value of kf.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 25

Question 35.
Given the equilibrium reaction, H2O(g) + CH4(g) ⇌ CO(g) + 3H2(g)
Using Le Chatelier’s principle, predict how concentration of CO will change when the equilibrium is disturbed by
i. adding CH4
ii. adding H2
iii. removing H2O
iv. removing H2
Answer:
i. Adding CH4: Adding CH4 will favour the forward reaction and the yield of CO and H2 will increase.
ii. Adding H2: Adding H2 will favour the reverse reaction and the yield of CO and H2 will decrease.
iii. Removing H2O: Removing H2O will favour the reverse reaction and the yield of CO and H2 will decrease.
iv. Removing H2: Removing H2 will favour the forward reaction and the yield of CO and H2 will increase.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 36.
By using Le Chatelier’s principle, explain the effect of change in pressure (due to volume change) on the composition of equilibrium mixture.
Answer:
Change in pressure:
i. The change in pressure has no effect on the concentrations of solids and liquids. However, it appreciably affects the concentrations of gases.
From the ideal gas equation, PV = nRT or P = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{V}}\)RT
∴ P ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{\mathrm{V}}\)
where, the ratio n/V is an expression for the concentration of the gas in mol dm-3.
ii. According to Le Chatelier’s principle at constant temperature, when pressure is increased, the equilibrium will shift in a direction in which the number of molecules decreases and when the pressure is decreased the equilibrium will shift in a direction in which the number of molecules increases.

[Note: For a reaction in which decrease in volume takes place, the reaction will be favoured by increasing pressure and for a reaction in which increase in volume takes place, the reaction will be favoured with lowering pressure, temperature being constant.]

Question 37.
An equilibrium mixture of dinitrogen tetroxide (colourless gas) and nitrogen dioxide (brown gas) is set up in a sealed flask at a particular temperature. Observe the effect of change of pressure on the gaseous equilibrium and complete the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 26
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 27

Question 38.
By using Le Chatelier’s principle, explain the effect of change in pressure for the following equilibrium:
H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g)
Answer:
As there is the same number of molecules of gas on both sides, change of pressure has no effect on the equilibrium.

Question 39.
Explain the effect of change in pressure due to volume change of the following equilibria:
i. 2NO(g) + Cl2(g) ⇌ 2NOCl(g)
ii. 2NO(g) ⇌ N2(g) + O2(g)
Answer:
i. 2NO(g) + Cl2(g) ⇌ 2NOCl(g)
In the forward reaction, the number of molecules decreases (3 to 2) and in the reverse reaction the number of molecules increases (2 to 3).
a. Effect of increase in pressure: According to Le Chatelier’s principle, when pressure is increased the forward reaction is favoured as the number of molecules decreases. Thus, when the pressure of the equilibrium system is increased at constant temperature by reducing the volume, the yield of NOCl increases.
b. Effect of decrease in pressure: When the pressure is decreased the equilibrium will shift from right to left. Therefore, the yield of NOCl will decrease.

ii. 2NO(g) ⇌ N2(g) + O2(g)
As both reactants and products have equal numbers of moles (or molecules), there is no effect of change in pressure (due to volume change) on the composition of the equilibrium mixture.

Question 40.
Explain the effect of change in temperature on the value of KC.
Answer:

  • The value of equilibrium constant is unaffected if temperature remains constant.
  • However, a change in temperature alters the value of equilibrium constant.
  • In a reversible reaction, one of the reactions is exothermic (heat is released) and the other is endothermic (heat is absorbed).
  • The value of equilibrium constant for an exothermic reaction decreases with increase in the temperature and that of endothermic reaction increases with the increase in temperature.

Question 41.
Explain the effect of change in temperature on the following equilibria:
CO(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ CH3OH(g) ; ΔH = – 90 kJ
Answer:
i. The forward reaction is exothermic and reverse reaction is endothermic. According to Le Chatelier’s principle, when the temperature of the equilibrium mixture increases, the equilibrium shifts from right to left in endothermic direction. Therefore, the yield of CH3OH decreases at high temperature.

ii. When the temperature decreases, the forward exothermic reaction is favoured. Therefore, the yield of CH3OH increases at low temperature.
Thus, the decomposition of CH3OH into CO and H2 is favoured with increase in temperature, whereas formation of CH3OH is favoured with decrease in temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 42.
By using Le Chatelier’s principle, explain the effect of addition of a catalyst on the composition of equilibrium mixture.
Answer:

  • When a catalyst is added to the equilibrium mixture, the rates of forward and reverse reactions increases to the same extent. Hence, the position of equilibrium remains unaffected.
  • A catalyst does not change the composition of equilibrium mixture. The equilibrium concentrations of reactants and products remain same and catalyst does not shift the equilibrium in favour of either reactants or products.
  • The value of equilibrium constant is also not affected by the presence of a catalyst.

[Note: A catalyst does not appear in the balanced chemical equation and in the equilibrium constant expression.]

Question 43.
Consider an esterification reaction:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 28
What will happen if H+ ions are added to the reaction mixture?
Answer:
H+ ions act as catalyst in the esterification reaction. Hence, the addition of H+ ions reduces the time for the completion of reaction.

Question 44.
Complete the following table that shows the shifts in the equilibrium position for the reaction:
N2O4(g) + Heat ⇌ 2NO2(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 29
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 30

Question 45.
Summarize effects of following four factors on the position of equilibrium and value of KC:
i. Concentration
ii. Pressure
iii. Temperature
iv. Catalyst
Answer:

Effect of Position of equilibrium Value of KC
Concentration Changes No change
Pressure Changes if reaction involves change in number of gas molecules No change
Temperature Change Change
Catalyst No change No change

Question 46.
State TRUE or FALSE. Correct the false statement.
i. The value of equilibrium constant depends on temperature.
ii. If QC < KCC, the reaction will proceed from right to left consuming more product to attain equilibrium.
iii. Any change in the pressure of a gaseous reaction mixture at equilibrium, changes the value of KC.
iv. In a reversible reaction, the reverse reaction has an energy change that is equal and opposite to that of the forward reaction.
Answer:
i. True
ii. False
If QC > KC the reaction will proceed from right to left consuming more product to attain equilibrium.
iii. False
Any change in the pressure of a gaseous reaction mixture at equilibrium, does not change the value of KC.
iv. True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Question 47.
Draw the flowchart showing the manufacture of NH3 by Haber process.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 31

Question 48.
Explain in short: The Haber process.
Answer:
Haber process:

  • The Haber process is the process of synthesis of ammonia gas by reacting together hydrogen gas and nitrogen gas in a particular stoichiometric ratio by volumes and at selected optimum temperature and pressure.
  • The chemical reaction is: \(\mathrm{N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})}+3 \mathrm{H}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \stackrel{\text { Catalyst }}{\rightleftharpoons} 2 \mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}+\text { Heat }\)
    The reaction proceeds with a decrease in number of moles (Δn = -2) and the forward reaction is exothermic.
  • Iron (containing a small quantity of molybdenum) is used as catalyst.
  • The optimum temperature is about 773 K and the optimum pressure is about 250 atm.

Question 49.
Consider the reaction P(g) + Q(g) ⇌ PQ(g). Diagram ‘X’ represents the reaction at equilibrium.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 32
i. If each molecule (sphere) represents a partial pressure of 1 atm, calculate the value of KP.
ii. Predict the change in equilibrium, when the volume is increased by 50 percentage.
Answer:
i. For the given equilibrium mixture:

Chemical species P Q PQ
Partial pressure 4 6 7

KP = \(\frac{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{PQ}}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{p}} \times \mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{Q}}}=\frac{7}{4 \times 6}\) = 0.29
ii. Increasing the volume will shift the equilibrium position to the side with higher number of gaseous moles. In the given reaction, the equilibrium will shift to the left (toward reactant) resulting in an increase in the concentration of P and Q accompanied by a corresponding decrease in concentration of PQ.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which of the following is expression of KC for
2NH3(g) ⇌ N2(g) + 3H2(g)?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 33
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{\left[\mathrm{N}_{2}\right]\left[\mathrm{H}_{2}\right]^{3}}{\left[\mathrm{NH}_{3}\right]^{2}}\)

2. For the system 3A + 2B ⇌ C, the expression for equilibrium constant is …………..
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium 34
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{[\mathrm{C}]}{[\mathrm{A}]^{3}[\mathrm{~B}]^{2}}\)

3. For the reaction C(s) + CO2(g) ⇌ 2CO(g) the partial pressure of CO2 and CO are 4 and 8 atm, respectively, then KP for the reaction is ……………
(A) 16 atm
(B) 2 atm
(C) 5 atm
(D) 4 atm
Answer:
(A) 16 atm

4. The equilibrium constant value for the reaction:
2H2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2H2O(g) is 2.4 × 1047 at 500 K. What is the value of equilibrium constant for the reaction:
2H2O(g) ⇌ 2H2(g) + O2(g) ?
(A) 0.41 × 10-46
(B) 0.41 × 1047
(C) 0.41 × 10-48
(D) 0.41 × 10-47
Answer:
(D) 0.41 × 10-47

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

5. For the reaction CO(g) + Cl2(g) ⇌ COCl2(g), KP/KC is equal to ……………
(A) \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{RT}}\)
(B) RT
(C) \(\sqrt{\mathrm{RT}}\)
(D) 1.0
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{RT}}\)

6. For which of the following reaction, KP = KC?
(A) PCl5(g) ⇌ PCl3(g) + Cl2(g)
(B) N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g)
(C) H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g)
(D) 2NO2(g) ⇌ N2O4(g)
Answer:
(C) H2(g) + I2(g) ⇌ 2HI(g)

7. For the equilibrium reaction
2NO2(g) ⇌ N2O4(g) + 60.0 kJ, the increase in temperature ……………..
(A) favours the formation of N2O4
(B) favours the decomposition of N2O4
(C) does not affect the equilibrium
(D) stops the reaction
Answer:
(B) favours the decomposition of N2O4

8. The following reaction occurs in the blast furnace where iron ore is reduced to iron metal:
3Fe2O3(s) + 3CO(g) ⇌ 2Fe(l) + 3CO2(g)
Using the Le Chatelier’s principle, predict which one of the following will NOT disturb the equilibrium?
(A) Removal of CO
(B) Removal of CO2
(C) Addition of CO2
(D) Addition of Fe2O3
Answer:
(D) Addition of Fe2O3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 12 Chemical Equilibrium

9. The reaction A + B ⇌ C + D + heat, has reached equilibrium. The reaction may be made to proceed forward by
(A) adding more C
(B) adding more D
(C) decreasing the temperature
(D) increasing the temperature
Answer:
(C) decreasing the temperature

10. Identify the CORRECT statement.
(A) Catalyst lowers activation energy for the forward and reverse reactions by exactly the same amount.
(B) The value of equilibrium constant decreases in presence of a catalyst.
(C) Catalyst affect the position of the equilibrium.
(D) Catalyst changes the equilibrium composition of a reaction mixture.
Answer:
(A) Catalyst lowers activation energy for the forward and reverse reactions by exactly the same amount.

11. The equilibrium constant for the reaction:
N2(g) + O2(g) ⇌ 2NO(g) is 4 × 10-4 at 2000 K. In presence of a catalyst, the equilibrium is attained ten times faster. Therefore, the equilibrium constant in presence of catalyst of 2000 K is …………..
(A) 40 × 10-4
(B) 4 × 10-2
(C) 4 × 10-3
(D) 4 × 10-4
Answer:
(D) 4 × 10-4

12. The rate of formation of NH3 can be increased by using catalyst …………….
(A) Fe + Co
(B) Mo + Fr
(C) Fe + Mo
(D) Fe + Mg
Answer:
(C) Fe + Mo

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना विज्ञापन लेखन

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Hindi Yuvakbharati 11th Digest रचना विज्ञापन लेखन Notes, Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Hindi रचना विज्ञापन लेखन

विज्ञापन का सामान्य अर्थ है सूचना या विशिष्ट ज्ञापन वास्तव में आज की उपभोक्तावादी संस्कृति में यह विशेष महत्त्वपूर्ण है। इसका प्रभाव उपभोक्ता, विक्रेता तथा समाज के सभी वर्गों पर गहरा पड़ता है।

विज्ञापन का मुख्य उद्देश्य है –

  • उत्पाद की बिक्री बढ़ाना।
  • सामाजिक अथवा राजनीतिक अभियान को गति देना।
  • विद्यालयों / महाविद्यालयों में प्रवेश हेतु आवेदन-पत्र की जानकारी प्राप्त करना।
  • नाटक, संवाद, कहानी, सिनेमा आदि की जानकारी देना।
  • नौकरी देने / लेने हेतु जानकारी देना।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना विज्ञापन लेखन

विज्ञापन के नमूने :

प्रश्न 1.
निम्नलिखित जानकारी के आधार पर विज्ञापन तैयार कीजिए।
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना विज्ञापन लेखन 1
उत्तर:
“घर किराए पर देना है”
500 वर्गफीट, वन बी-एच्.के का फ्लैट गोरेगाँव रेल स्थानक से पाँच मिनट की दूरी पर उपलब्ध है। स्कूल और अस्पताल निकट। जॉगर्स पार्क के बगल/पास में। 24 घंटे पानी की सुविधा।
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना विज्ञापन लेखन 2
संपर्क : अभय पांडेय।
मोबाईल : 98xxxxxxx
समय : सुबह 11 से शाम 6
पता : 203 / गजानन कॉलनी, गोरेगाँव (प.), मुंबई।

प्रश्न 2.
निम्नलिखित जानकारी के आधार पर विज्ञापन तैयार कीजिए।
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना विज्ञापन लेखन 3
उत्तर:
आवश्यकता है

रामानंद विद्यालय, चेंबूर नाका, चेंबूर, मुंबई 71 के लिए खुले प्रवर्ग के लिए एक हिंदी-मराठी विषय के शिक्षक सेवक की आवश्यकता है। प्रार्थी का प्रशिक्षित एवं हिंदी-मराठी विषय में स्नातक होना अनिवार्य है। अपने शैक्षणिक अनुभव एवं प्रमाणपत्रों की प्रतियों के साथ प्रधानाचार्य से मिले।

दिनांक : 7 और 8 अक्टूबर 2017.
समय : सुबह 10.00 से 3.00 बजे तक
भ्रमणध्वनि : 98xxxxx

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना विज्ञापन लेखन

प्रश्न 3.
निम्नलिखित जानकारी के आधार पर विज्ञापन तैयार कीजिए।
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना विज्ञापन लेखन 4
उत्तर :
आवश्यकता है ….
सोसायटी के बगीचे की देखभाल करने हेतु अनुभवी माली की आवश्यकता है।

  • पेड़- पौधों की जानकारी आवश्यक
  • सोसायटी कंपाऊंड में रहने की व्यवस्था
  • 10000 से 15000 प्रतिमाह तनख्वाह
  • निर्व्यसनी, ईमानदार माली अपने दो फोटो और आधार कार्ड के साथ संपर्क करें।

सेक्रेटरी.
हरगोविंद सोसायटी
रामनगर, वरली।
भ्रमणध्वनि: 90xxxxxx
केवल इतवार के दिन शाम 4 से 7 के बीच ही संपर्क कर सकते हैं।

प्रश्न 4.
स्वास्थ्यवर्धक पेय के विक्री हेतु विज्ञापन तैयार कीजिए।
खुशखबर! खुशखबर!! खुशखबर!!!
रोजाना नाश्ते के साथ सेवन करें
स्वास्थ्य की हर समस्या से निजात पाएँ

  • शुगर फ्री, मोटापा घटाए
  • कोई साईड इफेक्ट नहीं
  • त्वचा रखे सदाबहार
  • दाम भी कम

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना विज्ञापन लेखन

पेय एक लाभ अनेक
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना विज्ञापन लेखन 5
प्रथम 100 ग्राहकों को एक पर एक मुफ्त
हमारा पता
विश्वास ग्राहक सेवा, नासिक।
अधिक जानकारी के लिए www.vishwasgrahak.com
हमारी वेबसाइट पर जाए या विजिट करे।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना पत्र लेखन

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Hindi Yuvakbharati 11th Digest रचना पत्र लेखन Notes, Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Hindi रचना पत्र लेखन

पत्रलेखन एक कला है आजकल इसका साहित्यिक महत्त्व भी स्वीकारा जाने लगा है। एक अच्छे पत्र की पाँच विशेषताएँ होती हैं।

  1. सरल भाषा शैली।
  2. विचारों की सुस्पष्टता।
  3. संक्षेप एवं संपूर्णता।
  4. प्रभावान्विति।
  5. बाहरी सजावट।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना पत्र लेखन

पत्र लिखते समय निम्नलिखित वातों को ध्यान में रखना चाहिए –

  1. जहाँ तक संभव हो, पत्र में स्वाभाविकता का निर्वाह होना चाहिए। पत्र में कहीं बनावटीपन नहीं होना चाहिए।
  2. साधारण संबंधियों या अधिकारी या अपरिचित व्यक्तियों को लिखे पत्रों में कहीं भी अनावश्यक विस्तार या भावुकता नहीं होनी चाहिए।
  3. सरकारी और कामकाजी पत्रों में कहीं अनावश्यक विस्तार या भावुकता नहीं होनी चाहिए।
  4. निकट संबंधियों के लिखे पत्रों में पूर्ण आत्मीयता और स्वाभाविकता होनी चाहिए।
  5. पत्र को उपयुक्त परिच्छेदों में विभाजित करके लिखना चाहिए।
  6. पत्र की भाषा शुद्ध, सरल व प्रवाहपूर्ण होनी चाहिए। वर्तनी (Spelling) एवं विराम चिह्नों का समुचित प्रयोग होना चाहिए।
  7. पत्र संक्षिप्त, सुव्यवस्थित, सुस्पष्ट एवं हेतुपूर्ण होना चाहिए। अनावश्यक बातों के लिए पत्र में कोई जगह नहीं होती।

पत्र के प्रकार:

  1. व्यक्तिगत या पारिवारिक पत्र
  2. सामाजिक पत्र
  3. व्यावसायिक अथवा व्यापारिक पत्र
  4. कार्यालयीन पत्र

मुख्य रूप से औपचारिक और अनौपचारिक दो तरह के पत्र माने गए है।

औपचारिक पत्र : इस पत्र में संदेश, कथ्य, अपरिचित व्यक्ति एवं अधिकारी को लिखा जाता है इसमें प्राय: कार्यालयीन पत्र, सरकारी पत्र, व्यावसायिक व व्यासपीठ पत्र तथा शिकायती पत्र आते हैं। अनौपचारिक पत्र : इसमें व्यक्तिगत; सगे संबंधियों के पत्र, घरेलू या पारिवारिक पत्र आते हैं। अनौपचारिक पत्रों में पत्र लेखक और जिसे पत्र लिखा जाता है, उसके संबंध के अनुसार अभिवादन या अभिनिवेदन में भिन्नता होती। है निम्नलिखित तालिका में सारी बातें स्पष्ट की गई हैं।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना पत्र लेखन

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना पत्र लेखन 1

विशेष : जो संबंध छोटे-बड़े नहीं हैं या जिन संबंधो में व्यक्तिगत पत्रों जैसी नितांत आत्मीयता नहीं है बल्कि मात्र व्यावहारिकता है वहाँ ‘प्रणाम’ या ‘शुभाशीष’ जैसे किसी अभिवादन की आवश्यकता नहीं होती हैं।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना पत्र लेखन

पत्र का प्रारूप

अनौपचारिक पत्र

दिनांक : ………………………………..
संबोधन : ………………………………..
अभिवादन : ………………………………..
प्रारंभ : ………………………………..विषय विवेचन : ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..तुम्हारा / तुम्हारी : ………………………………..
नाम : ………………………………..
पता : ………………………………..
ई-मेल आईडी : ………………………………..

औपचारिक पत्र

दिनांक : ………………………………..
प्रति,
………………………………..
………………………………..विषय : ………………………………..
संदर्भ : ………………………………..
महोदय : ………………………………..
विषय विवेचन : ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..भवदीय/भवदीया,
हस्ताक्षर : ………………………………..
नाम : ………………………………..
पता : ………………………………..
ई-मेल आईडी : ………………………………..

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना पत्र लेखन

पत्र के नमूने

1. व्यक्ति गत / अनौपचारिक पत्र

दिनांक : 7 सितंबर, 2019.
आदरणीय पिताजी,
सादर प्रणाम।आपको यह जानकर खुशी होगी कि मैं यहाँ आनंद से हूँ। मैं अपने महाविद्यालय में कई सहपाठियों को मित्र बना चुका हूँ, जो अच्छे . स्वभाव के, परिश्रमी और अध्ययनशील है। मैं यहाँ अभी नया हूँ फिर भी सब का स्नेह प्राप्त है। यहाँ के प्राचार्य और प्राध्यापक सभी अच्छे हैं। उनका हम पर पूरा ध्यान रहता है। मैं विज्ञान परिषद का मंत्री चुना गया हूँ।यहाँ जीवन अत्यंत व्यस्त है। हर क्षण कीमती है। सब में एक तरह की प्रतियोगिता है। सभी एक-दूसरे से आगे निकलना चाहते हैं। मैं आप को विश्वास दिलाता हूँ कि जीतोड़ परिश्रम करके मैं परीक्षा में अच्छे अंक लाऊँगा। शेष कुशल है। पूजनीय माता जी को प्रणाम व प्रिया को आशीर्वाद।आपका स्नेहाकांक्षी,
शरद
नाम : शरद देशमुख
पता : बी- 212, साई कृपा,
महात्मा गांधी रोड,
विलेपार्ले (पूर्व), मुंबई – 400 057
ई-मेल आईडी : sharad2000@gmail.com

2. वधाई पत्र :

दिनांक. 15 जून, 2017
प्रिय सविता
सप्रेम नमस्ते।यह जानकर प्रसन्नता हुई कि तुम बारहवीं कक्षा में प्रथम श्रेणी में उत्तीर्ण हुई हो और तुम्हें 86 प्रतिशत अंक मिले हैं तुम्हारी इस सफलता पर मैं तुम्हें हार्दिक बधाई देती हूँ। आशा करती हूँ कि तुम्हें आगे की परीक्षा में भी ऐसी ही सफलता मिलती रहे।वैद्यकीय या अभियांत्रिकी शिक्षा में तुम अपनी रुचि के अनुसार ही प्रवेश लो, तुम्हें अवश्य सफलता मिलेगी। तुम्हारे माता-पिता को प्रणाम।तुम्हारी कुशलता की कामना के साथ।
तुम्हारी सहेली,
प्रभा
नाम : प्रभा शर्मा
पता : डी, 107, साकेत,
नवघर रोड, ठाणे (पू.)
ई-मेल आईडी : psharma.2017@gmail.com

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना पत्र लेखन

3. निमंत्रण पत्र:

दिनांक : 15 अप्रैल, 2019,
प्रिय भाई भावेश,
सप्रेम नमस्ते।आपको यह जानकर प्रसन्नता होगी कि अगामी 5 मई, 2019, रविवार के दिन मेरे नए घर का गृहप्रवेश है! इस शुभ अवसर पर सपरिवार उपस्थित होकर हमे कृतार्थ करें।आशा है कि आप हमें अनुग्रहित करेंगे।आपका शुभाकांक्षी,
अनिल कुमार।
नाम : अनिल कुमार पाठक
पता : 70/क, कलासागर,
खार (प.), मंबई-400 052.
ई-मेल आईडी : anilpathale@yahoo.com

4. भावी योजना हेतु मित्र को पत्र

दिनांक : 20 मार्च, 2019.
प्रिय मित्र अशोक,
नमस्ते।तुम्हारा पत्र मिला। समाचार पाकर प्रसन्नता हुई। पिछले हप्ते ही मेरी परीक्षा समाप्त हुई है। अगले हप्ते सी इ टी की परीक्षा भी है, जिसकी तैयारी कर रहा हूँ। मेरे प्रश्न पत्र अच्छे गए हैं। बारहवीं में 85% अंक पाने की उम्मीद है।माता जी और पिता जी चाहते हैं कि मैं अभियंता (इंजीनियर) बनू किंतु मेरी रुचि डॉक्टरी में है। बचपन से ही एक सपना देखा है। डॉक्टरी में अर्थलाभ के साथ मानव-सेवा का सुअवसर भी प्राप्त होगा। यह किसी अन्य व्यवसाय में संभव नहीं है।यदि तुम्हारी सलाह भी मुझे शीघ्र मिले तो बेहतर होगा। चाचा और चाची को मेरा प्रणाम। शेष कुशल है।तुम्हारा मित्र,
सतीश
नाम :- सतीश ठाकुर,
पता : 105, कलाकुंज,
शनिवार पेठ, पुणे – 7.
ई-मेल आई.डी. : satish.thakur@gmail.com

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना पत्र लेखन

(5) कार्यालयीन पत्र :

दिनांक : 20 अक्टूबर, 2019
प्रति,
श्री.पुलिस इंस्पेक्टर, शहर पुलिस थाना, वर्धा। विषय : पटाखे असमय फोडने पर प्रतिबंध लगाने हेतु अनुरोधन-पत्रमान्यवर महोदय,
दीवाली के इस शुभ अवसर पर रंग में भंग डालने की मेरी कोई मनिषा नहीं है। पर्व त्योहार मनाने की स्वतंत्रता में मैं बाधा नहीं डालना| चाहता हूँ। परंतु दीवाली के पटाखों से मुहल्ले में दिन-रात शोर-शराबा चलता है। घर में बुजुर्ग और छोटे बच्चे भी होते हैं। उनपर इसका बुरा प्रभाव पड़ता है।ऊपर से प्रदूषण भी बढ़ता है। मैं सुरेश भोसले आपको विनम्र अनुरोध करता हूँ कि आप इन पटाखों के फोड़ने पर कुछ-कुछ प्रतिबंध लगाएँ। एक निश्चित समय पर ही फोड़ने की इजाजत दें। ज्यादा आवाज करनेवाले पटाखों पर प्रतिबंध डाल दें। इस से ध्वनि प्रदूषण कम होगा और सबकी परेशानी मिटेगी।उम्मीद करता हूँ कि आप हमारी परेशानी को गंभीरता से लेंगे और अपने अधिकारों का उपयोग कर ठोस कदम उठाएँगे। तसदी के लिए माफी चाहता हूँ।भवदीय,
सुरेश भोसले।
नाम : सुरेश भोसले,
पता : 50, सेवा सदन,
गोखले नगर, वर्धा।
ई-मेल आई.डी : sureshb1978@gmail.com

(6)

दिनांक : 30 मई, 2019.
सेवा में,
श्रीमान प्रधानाध्यापक,
वैद्यनाथ विद्यालय,
परली।
विषय : पाँचवी कक्षा में प्रवेश दिलाने के लिए प्रार्थना पत्रमान्यवर महोदय,
वैद्यनाथ विद्यालय परली में ही नहीं बल्कि महाराष्ट्र के सबसे अच्छे विद्यालयों में से एक है। मैं चाहती हूँ कि मेरा छोटा भाई कमलेश आगे की पढ़ाई आपके विद्यालय में करे। पिछले वर्ष चौथी कक्षा में उसे अस्सी प्रतिशत अंक आए हैं। वह पढ़ाई के साथ-साथ खेल में भी अच्छा है।दौड़ प्रतियोगिता में उसने राज्यस्तर पर कांस्य पदक प्राप्त किया है। नृत्य और अभिनय जैसी कलाओं में भी निपुण है। उसके इन सभी गुणों का आपके विद्यालय में और विकास होगा। उम्मीद करती हूँ कि आप मना नहीं करेंगे।इस पत्र के साथ मैं चौथी के अंक-पत्र की प्रतिलिपि भेज रही हूँ। आपसे नम्र निवेदन है कि आप मेरे भाई को पाँचवी कक्षा में प्रवेश देने की कृपा करें।धन्यवाद।
प्रार्थी,
शैलजा पाठक।
नाम : शैलजा पाठक,
पता : 460, आसरा,
नेताजी मार्ग, परली।
ई-मेल आई.डी.: shaila.pathale@gmail.com

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना पत्र लेखन

7. व्यावसायिक पत्र :

दिनांक : 16 जून, 2019
सेवा में,
मा. व्यवस्थापक,
क्वालिटी स्पोर्टस्
अप्पा बळवंत चौक, पुणे।
विषय : खेल सामग्री की माँग
संदर्भ : अखबार में छपा विज्ञापनमान्यवर महोदय,
जन-जागरण में प्रकाशित आपके विज्ञापन से ज्ञात हुआ कि आपके यहाँ सभी प्रकार की खेल सामग्री उपलब्ध है। मैं माधव बाग के क्रीड़ा-मंडल का अध्यक्ष होने के नाते आपको यह पत्र लिख रहा हूँ। जल्द ही हमारे यहाँ वार्षिक खेल उत्सव शुरू होगा। इसके लिए मुझे निम्नलिखित खेल-सामग्री की आवश्यकता है।

अनु. क्र.  1.  2.  3.  4.
सामग्री  फुटबॉल  बास्केटबॉल  हॉकी स्टिक्स  नेट
नग  10  10  08  02

नियमानुसार पाँच सौ रुपए का पोस्टल आर्डर आपको भेज रहा हूँ। शेष रकम वी.पी.पी. छुड़ाते समय अदा की जाएगी। उचित कमीशन देने की कृपा करें। खेल सामग्री जल्द से जल्द ऊपर लिखे पते पर भेजने की कोशिश करें।

धन्यवाद,
भवदीय,
अरूण पाटील।
पता : माधव बाग,
सांगली।
ई-मेल आई.डी.: arunp-2898@gmail.com

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना पत्र लेखन

8. सामाजिक पत्र :

दिनांक : 20 जून, 2019
सेवा में,
मा. स्वास्थ्य अधिकारी,
नगर परिषद, कोल्हापुर।विषय : मुहल्ले की अस्वच्छता दूर कराने के लिए निवेदनमहोदय,

मैं कोल्हापुर की नागरिक हूँ और शिवनेरी, खासबाग मैदान के पास रहती हूँ। मैं मुहल्ले के नागरिकों के प्रतिनिधि के रूप में आपका ध्यान एक महत्त्वपूर्ण समस्या की ओर आकर्षित करना चाहती हूँ।पिछले कई दिनों से मुहल्ले की सफाई ठीक से नहीं हुई है। जगह-जगह गंदगी फैली हुई है।

कचरे की पेटियाँ बहुत छोटी हैं और उनकी संख्या भी पर्याप्त नहीं है। उचित मात्रा में कीटनाशक औषधियों का छिड़काव भी नहीं किया जाता। भयंकर बदबू के कारण आने-जाने वालों को भारी परेशानी का सामना करना पड़ता है। मुहल्ले में मच्छरों का प्रकोप भी बढ़ा है।

इसके कारण संक्रामक रोगों के फैलने की आशंका उत्पन्न हो गई है।आकस्मिक रूप से हुई भारी वर्षा ने जनता के कष्ट और भी बढ़ा दिए हैं।अत: आप से विनम्र निवेदन है कि तत्काल सफाई का उचित प्रबंध किया जाए। नई कचरा पेटियाँ रखी जाएँ और कीटनाशक दवाएँ छिड़की जाएँ।आशा है, इस दिशा में तत्काल उचित कार्रवाई करेंगे।

तसदी के लिए क्षमस्व,
भवदीया,
संगीता कोटणीस।
नाम : सांगीत कोटणीस
पता : 46, शिवनेरी, शाहू नगर,
खासबाग मैदान, कोल्हापुर।
ई-मेल आई.डी.: sangeeta-2010@gmail.com

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Hindi Yuvakbharati 11th Digest रचना निबंध लेखन Notes, Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

निबंध लेखन :

गद्य लिखना अगर कवियों की कसौटी है तो निबंध लिखना गद्यकारों की कसौटी है। निबंध शब्द दो शब्दों से मिलकर बना है नि-बंध। बंध का अर्थ है बाँधना या बंधा हुआ इसमें लगे ‘नि’ उपसर्ग का अर्थ होता है अच्छी तरह से। अत: निबंध का तात्पर्य उस रचना से है जिसे अच्छी तरह बाँधा गया हो।

किसी भी विषय पर अपने भाव, विचार, अनुभव जानकारी इत्यादि को अपनी शैली में क्रमबद्ध कर अभिव्यक्त करना ही निंबध है। निबंध कैसे लिखा जाय? यह महत्त्वपूर्ण है। भाषा शैली का इसमें विशेष महत्त्व है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

निबंध लेखन में महत्त्वपूर्ण बातें

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन 1

उपर्युक्त क्रम से अंकित एक से बारह तत्त्वों को अनुच्छेद के अनुसार व्यक्त किया जा सकता है। इसी रूप में निबंध को विस्तार दिया जाता है। यदि इसको संक्षिप्त करना है तो दो तत्त्वों को एक अनुच्छेद में समाहित कर अभिव्यक्त किया जा सकता है।

विषय को भली प्रकार से समझ बूझकर उसकी भूमिका बाँधनी चाहिए और विषय प्रवेश के साथ उसके महत्त्व को उजागर करना चाहिए। विस्तार में विषय के प्रकार, शिक्षा विकास, सामाजिक महत्त्व आदि दिखाना चाहिए। विचार स्पष्ट, तर्कपूर्ण एवं सुलझा हुआ होना चाहिए। निबंध में विषयांतर एवं पुनरुक्ति दोष से बचना आवश्यक होता है।

निबंध के संपादन के साथ-समापन भी आकर्षक होना चाहिए। इसमें लेखक का अपना विचार होना आवश्यक होता है। निबंध की भाषा सरल, प्रभावी व व्याकरणनिष्ठ होनी चाहिए। वाक्य जितने छोटे व स्पष्ट होंगे, निबंध उतना ही प्रभावशाली होगा।

निबंध को प्रभावशाली बनाने के लिए प्रसिद्ध काव्य पंक्तियों, उक्तियों, मुहावरों, सटीक लोकोक्तियों व घटनाओं का प्रयोग किया जा सकता है। वर्तनी की शुद्धता के साथ विराम चिह्नों का प्रयोग कुशलता पूर्वक करना चाहिए।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

निबंध के प्रकार : निबंध पाँच प्रकार के होते हैं :

  1. वर्णनात्मक निबंध
  2. कथात्मक या विवरणात्मक निबंध
  3. कल्पनात्मक निबंध
  4. आत्मकथात्मक निबंध
  5. विचारात्मक निबंध।

(1) वर्णनात्मक निबंध : इस निबंध में वर्णन की प्रधानता रहती है। वर्णन में कभी-कभी निजी अनुभूति एवं कल्पना का रंग भी भरना पड़ता है। वस्तु, स्थान, घटना, प्रसंग, यात्रा, अनुभव आदि का रोचक वर्णन किया जाता है। प्राकृतिक दृश्य, त्योहार, उत्सव में एक घंटा आदि निबंध इसी प्रकार के अंतर्गत आते हैं। ‘वर्षा का एक दिन’ निबंध भी इसी के अंतर्गत आता है।

(2) कथात्मक या विवरणात्मक निबंध : किसी घटना अथवा कथा का विवरण, किसी प्रसंग का चित्रण या निरूपण, किसी की जीवन कथा, या आत्मकथा आदि का समावेश इस प्रकार के निबंधों में होता है। निर्जीव वस्तु की आत्मकथा भी यथार्थ का भ्रम करा सके, ऐसी शैली में लिखना चाहिए। जैसे – महात्मा गांधीजी, रेल दुर्घटना, बाढ़ का प्रकोप आदि निबंध।

(3) कल्पनात्मक निबंध : जिन निबंधों में कल्पना तत्त्व की प्रधानता होती है, उसे कल्पना प्रधान निबंध कहते हैं। इसके अंतर्गत जो बात नहीं होती, उसकी कल्पना की जाती है, कभी असंभव – सी बातों को संभव माना जाता है। लेखक कल्पना की ऊँची उड़ान ले सकता है। इस प्रकार के निबंधों के अंतर्गत यदि – होता, अगर …… न होता, मेरी अभिलाषा आदि विषय हैं। जैसे – यदि परीक्षा न होती, अगर मैं बंदी होता, अगर मैं प्रधानमंत्री होता आदि।

(4) आत्मकथात्मक निबंध : इसमें किसी वस्तु, प्राणी या व्यक्ति की आत्मकथा होती है। विद्यार्थी अपने आपको वह वस्तु, प्राणी या व्यक्ति मानकर निबंध लिखता है। इसमें लेखक कल्पना की उड़ान भर सकता है। इसमें जीवित व निर्जीव दोनों तरह की घटना का आरंभ उत्तम पुरुष से होता है। इसमें किसी के दुःख-सुख के साथ लेखक अपने विचारों को भी प्रस्तुत करता है। जैसे – कुर्सी की आत्मकथा, फूल की आत्मकथा, फटे पुस्तक की आत्मकथा आदि।

(5) विचारात्मक निबंध : ऐसे निबंधों में विचार प्रमुख होता है इसमें कल्पना का पुट न के बराबर होता है। इसका आधार तर्क या प्रमाण होता है। किसी के पक्ष या विपक्ष में सकारात्मक तथा नकारात्मक तथ्यों का संपादन बड़ी कुशलता से किया जाता है। समीक्षा व आकलन इस निबंध का आधार होता है।

गरीबी एक अभिशाप, माँ की ममता, वृक्ष लगाओ देश बचाओ, विविधता में एकता, वही मनुष्य है कि जो मनुष्य के लिए मरे, जीवन का लक्ष्य, आदर्श मित्र, आदर्श विदयार्थी, सदाचार का महत्त्व, समय का सदुपयोग, परोपकार, राष्ट्रभाषा की समस्या, समाचार पत्र, विज्ञान-वरदान या अभिशाप, स्त्री भ्रूण हत्या, भ्रष्टाचार उन्मूलन आदि विषय इसके अंतर्गत आते हैं।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi निबंध

1. होली का त्यौहार

हमारे यहाँ त्योहारों का सिलसिला वर्षभर चलता है। इसीलिए हमारे देश को त्योहारों का देश कहते हैं। ईद, बकरी ईद, ओणम, पोंगल, बैसाखी, रक्षा बंधन, होली, दशहरा, दीपावली, इत्यादि प्रमुख त्योहार हैं। होली रंगों का त्यौहार है।

होली का त्योहार मनाने के पीछे धार्मिक कारण है। कहते हैं कि हिरण्यकश्यप नामक शैतान, प्रहलाद जैसे ईश्वर भक्त बेटे का पिता था, जो घमंड के कारण अपने आप को ईश्वर समझता था। उसकी एक बहन होलिका थी जिसे वरदान था कि वह अग्नि में नहीं जलेगी।

होलिका अपने भाई की मदद के लिए प्रहलाद को लेकर जलती हुई अग्नि में बैठ गई। नारायण की कृपा से प्रहलाद तो बच गया लेकिन होलिका जल गई। तभी से होलिका दहन किया जाने लगा। यह असत्य पर सत्य की विजय का पर्व है। जिसके दूसरे दिन लोग रंगों से एक दूसरे का स्वागत करते हैं।

हमारा देश किसानों का देश है। यह उनकी फसलों का भी त्योहार है। फसल का रसास्वादन होली की खुशी लेकर आता है। लोग एक-दूसरे को अबीर-गुलाल लगाकर नाचते-गाते हैं। इस दिन शैतान को कबीरा सुनाकर ताना भी मारा जाता है। होली के गीत अत्यंत मनोरंजक व आकर्षक होते हैं।

भगवान श्री कृष्ण राधा के साथ होली खेलते थे। बरसाने और ब्रज की लठमार होली आज भी उसी उमंग से मनाई जाती है। लोग मिठाई बाँटते हैं, ठंडाई पीते हैं। अपने गिले-शिकवे मिटाकर एक-दूसरे को गले लगाते हैं। सभी होली के रंग में घुल-मिल जाते हैं।

कुछ गलत परंपराएँ चल पड़ी हैं जिसे रोकना अनिवार्य है। जैसे – गंदा पानी, कीचड़, गोबर, पेंट, शराब व भाँग का प्रचलन। नशे की हालत में किया गया व्यवहार इस सुंदर पर्व को बदरंग कर देता है, जिससे आर्थिक नुकसान के साथ आपसी दुश्मनी को बढ़ावा मिलता है। घातक रंगों के प्रयोग से आँखों की रोशनी पर भी कुप्रभाव पड़ता है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

होली के स्नेह सम्मेलन एक – दूसरे को आपस में जोड़ते हैं-

होली के दिन दिल मिल जाते हैं
रंगों में रंग मिल जाते हैं।
गिले-शिकवे सभी भूल कर
दुश्मन भी गले मिल जाते हैं।

यदि गंदगी फूहड़ता तथा नशे पर रोक लगाई जा सके, तो इससे उत्तम पर्व कोई भी नहीं हो सकता।

2. राष्ट्रभाषा हिंदी

राष्ट्रभाषा हमारे विचारों की संवाहक होती है। इसके माध्यम से हम अपने भावों और विचारों को अभिव्यक्त करते हैं। प्रत्येक देश की भाषा उसकी अपनी पहचान होती है। उसका संपूर्ण कार्य उसी भाषा में होता है। राष्ट्रभाषा किसी राष्ट्र के उद्गार का माध्यम होती है। फ्रांस, चीन, जर्मनी, जपान, रूस अपनी भाषा की बदौलत आज पूरे विश्व में अपनी पहचान बनाए हुए हैं और महाशक्ति के रूप में जाने जाते हैं।

हमारे देश की सर्वाधिक जनता हिंदी भाषा का प्रयोग करती है, इसी कारण महात्मा गांधीजी ने कहा था कि हिंदी ही राष्ट्रभाषा बनने योग्य हैं। इसीलिए 14 सितंबर 1949 को भारतीय संविधान में हिंदी को राष्ट्रभाषा के रूप में प्रस्तावित किया गया। पूरे देश को हिंदी सीखने के लिए 15 वर्ष का समय दिया गया। इसे 14 सिंतबर 1964 से कार्यान्वित करने का भी प्रस्ताव था किंतु राजनैतिक कारणों से हिंदी को राष्ट्रभाषा के रूप में आज भी संसद में पारित नहीं किया गया है।

जिस देश की अपनी कोई भाषा नहीं, वह देश या राष्ट्र गूंगा है।

भूतपूर्व प्रधान मंत्री अटल बिहारी वाजपेयीजी ने हिंदी को संयुक्त राष्ट्र संघ की भाषा तो बना दिया किंतु राष्ट्रभाषा हिंदी संसद की भाषा नहीं बन सकी। मारीशस, फिजी, त्रिनिदाद, सूरीनाम, गुयाना, कनाडा, इंग्लैण्ड, नेपाल आदि देशों में हिंदी की अपनी एक अलग पहचान है। भारत में यह षडयंत्र की शिकार है।

14 सिंतबर को हर वर्ष ‘हिंदी दिवस’ मनाया जाता है। जब तक हम व्यावहारिक रूप में राष्ट्रभाषा को स्वीकार नहीं करते तब तक भारत के संपूर्ण विकास पर प्रश्न चिह्न लगा रहेगा।

राष्ट्रभाषा हिंदी ही है, जो पूरे-देश को एक सूत्र में बाँधने की क्षमता रखती है। इसे शिक्षा का माध्यम बनाने से हमारे देश में अत्यधिक बहुमुखी प्रतिभाएँ निकल कर आगे आएँगी। महात्मा गांधीजी ने भी स्वीकार किया था कि शिक्षा मातृभाषा में होनी चाहिए; उच्च व तकनीकी शिक्षा भी हिंदी माध्यम से दी जा सकती है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

3. भ्रष्टाचार :

एक राष्ट्रीय अभिशाप । एक समय था जब चुनाव से पहले हर राजनैतिक दल इस देश से भ्रष्टाचार मिटाने का वादा किया करते थे। देश में चुनाव होते गए और राजनैतिक दल अदल-बदल कर सत्तारूढ़ होते गए। जैसे-जैसे दिन बीतता गया इस देश में भ्रष्टाचार बढ़ता गया, अब तो आकंठ डूबे भ्रष्टाचार और राजनेता एक-दूसरे के पर्याय बन गये हैं। अब कोई भी राजनैतिक दल भ्रष्टाचार मिटाने की बात नहीं करता। सभी इस विशालकाय दैत्य के सामने नतमस्तक हैं।

भ्रष्टाचार का अर्थ है दूषित आचरण या बेईमानी। आज भ्रष्टाचार की काली छाया संपूर्ण देश में अमावस्या की तरह व्याप्त हो गई है और सत्तासीन लोग भ्रष्टाचार मिटाने के नाम पर बहती गंगा में हाथ धो रहे हैं। अब भ्रष्टाचार के नाम पर नाक-भौं सिकोड़ने की बजाय इसे अंगीकार कर लिया गया है।

आज भी कुछ लोग ऐसे हैं, जो भ्रष्टाचार से कोसों दूर हैं किंतु वे भ्रष्टाचारियों का विरोध करने की हिम्मत नहीं जुटा पाते। दुःस्साहस करनेवाले मुँह की खाते हैं उनकी आवाज नक्कारखाने में तूती की आवाज बनकर रह जाती है।

वैसे तो भ्रष्टाचार कमोबेश पूरे विश्व में व्याप्त है किंतु हमारे देश में यह सिंहासनारूढ़ है। इसका कारण है हमारे देश की चुनाव पद्धति। जिसे जीतने के लिए प्रत्याशी पानी की तरह पैसा बहाते हैं। अपनी सेवानिष्ठा ईमानदारी, योग्यता के बल पर न ही कोई चुनाव लड़ता है और न ही जीत पाता है। चुनाव में सफल होने पर वह हर हाल में अपना खर्च किया हुआ पैसा ब्याज के साथ वसूलता है। पैसे की प्राप्ति की अधीरता ही उसे भ्रष्टाचारी बनने को मजबूर करती है।

इसका दूसरा कारण है भौतिकवादी सभ्यता का प्रसार और पाश्चात्य देशों का अंधानुकरण। लोग सारे नियम कानून को ताक पर रखकर पैसा कमाने के चक्कर में भ्रष्टाचारी बन जाते हैं। चारों तरफ धन बटोरने की अफरा-तफरी मची हुई है। लोग विदेशी बैंकों में पैसे जमा करते जा रहे हैं।

आज का प्रत्यक्ष आकड़ा बताता है कि भारतीय भ्रष्टाचारियों का चौदह हजार लाख करोड़ रुपया विदेशी बैंकों की शोभा बढ़ा रहा है जो निश्चित रूप से काला धन है। सबने इसे अपनी जीवन पद्धति में शामिल कर लिया है।

नशीले पदार्थो का व्यापार कानून व्यवस्था के रखवालों के हाथ की कठपुतली बन चुका है। देश का युवावर्ग भ्रष्टाचारियों को आदर्श मानकर उसी रास्ते पर चल रहा है। उनके मन से राष्ट्राभिमान और राष्ट्र-प्रेम लुप्त होता जा रहा है। तकनीकी और प्राथमिक शिक्षण व्यवसाय बन चुका है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

बाबा रामदेव, अन्ना हजारे जैसे लोग इसके खिलाफ आवाज उठाते हैं। यदि हम राष्ट्र को विश्व की प्रथम पंक्ति में बिठाना चाहते है तो भ्रष्टाचार रूपी रावण का दहन आवश्यक है। समाज सेवकों की मेहनत रंग लाएगी। सत्तासीनों की पोल खुलेगी, जनता जगेगी, निश्चित रूप से काला धन वापस आएगा।

देश का युवावर्ग जिस दिन जगेगा भ्रष्टाचार के रावण का अंत होगा और ध्वंस होगा भ्रष्टाचार का साम्राज्य। नए राष्ट्र का उदय होगा और तब साकार होगा। ‘मेरा भारत महान’ का स्वप्न।

4. मैं मोवाईल वोल रहा हूँ

आज विज्ञान प्रदत्त सुविधाओं को हम नकार नहीं सकते। दूरदर्शन, दूरध्वनि, ट्रांजिस्टर ,संगणक, विमान, राकेट, आदि की खोज ने मानव जीवन को एक नई दिशा दी है। कुछ दिन पहले ही पेजर आया बाद में लोगों को पता चला कि फोन भी आ रहा है। अब जब से मेरा आगमन हुआ है मैनें लोगों की दुनिया में क्रांति ला दी है।

जब मेरा बड़ा भाई टेलिफोन इस दुनिया में आया तो उसने पत्रलेखन की कमी को दूर कर लोगों के आपसी संबंध को जोड़ने का प्रयास किया। लेकिन जैसे ही मैंने इस दुनिया में कदम रखा बड़े भाई की परेशानी दूर कर दी। लोगों ने मुझे अपनी जेब में रखना शुरू किया।

मैंने भी लोगों की हर सुविधा का ध्यान रखा। फोटोग्राफी, खेल, सिनेमा, धारावाहिक, एफ एम रेडियो से लेकर हर सुविधा जो दृश्य – श्रव्य साधनों द्वारा प्राप्त होती है, मैंने दी। हाँ! आया, ठीक सुना आपने मैं मोबाइल बोल रहा हूँ। जब से मैंने इस दुनिया में कदम रखा है, तब से सारे संसार में एक क्रांति आ गई है।

विज्ञान ने जो कुछ भी दिया मैं भी उसी की एक कड़ी हूँ। मैं आप लोगों की दिन – रात सेवा कर रहा हूँ। मैंने ऐसी मुहब्बत दी है कि मुझे एक पल के लिए भी आप अपने से अलग नहीं कर पाते।

आपको मैंने सुविधा दी और आप ने भी अपनी जेब से मुझे निकाल कर हाथ की बजाय एक तार से जोड़कर अपने कान में लगा लिया और घंटों बातें करते रहते हैं।

मेरे दोस्तों मुझे दुःख है कि लोगों ने मेरा दुरुपयोग करना शुरू कर दिया है। पता नहीं लोग इतना झूठ क्यों बोलते हैं। मेरी मोहब्बत में अंधे होकर अपनी जान क्यों दे रहे हैं? लोगों का मुझ पर आरोप है कि मैं लोगों का समय बरबाद कर रहा हूँ।

मैंने लोगों को झूठ बोलना सिखाया है। मैंने माहौल को गंदा किया है। आतंकवाद और भ्रष्टाचार को बढ़ाने में भी मेरा उपयोग हो रहा है। परीक्षा के समय भी छात्र मेरा उपयोग नकल करने में करते हैं। लेकिन इसमें मेरी गलती नहीं है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

मैं सबकी मदद करता हूँ। लोगों के दुःख, दर्द को दूर करता हूँ। लोगों के आपसी संबंधों में मधुरता लाता हूँ। इंटरनेट पर होनेवाली, घटनाओं की जानकारी देता हूँ। लोग मेरा सदुपयोग करने की बजाए दुरुपयोग करें, तो इसमें मेरी क्या गलती? मेरी दीवानगी में यदि आप अपना काम छोड़कर निष्क्रिय बन रहे हैं तो मैं क्या करूँ? मेरे दोस्तों मेरा सही प्रयोग करके मुझे बदनामी से आप ही बचा सकते हैं।

यदि मेरा सदुपयोग करेंगे तो मैं कभी किसी को कोई नुकसान नहीं पहुंचा सकता। मैं सूचना पहुँचाने का माध्यम हूँ। मनोरंजन का साधन हूँ। ज्ञान का भंडार हूँ। आपकी हर समस्या का समाधान हूँ। मुझे वही बने रहने दीजिए। मैं तो हमेशा आपकी सेवा में संलग्न रहना चाहता हूँ।

5. दीपावली के पटाखे

पिछले पंद्रह दिनों से लगातार पटाखों के शोर ने मेरी नींद उड़ा दी है। मैं तंग आ गया हूँ घर में बीमार पत्नी कराह रही थी। मैंने नीचे जाकर लोगों से मिन्नतें की लेकिन त्योहार के नाम पर शोर मचानेवालों ने परंपरा की बात कहकर मेरा मजाक उड़ाया। नियम से दस बजे तक ही पटाखे फोड़ने चाहिए लेकिन पूरी रात तक इसका क्रम चलता रहा। दिवाली के दिन तो हद हो गई।

जिसने मुझे चिढ़ाया था, परंपरा की दुहाई दी थी, संस्कृति और पर्व के नाम पर भाषण सुनाया था, पटाखे के धमाके से उसके पिता को दिल का दौरा पड़ा। आधी रात को हम लोग उन्हें अस्पताल ले गए पर दुर्भाग्य कि अब वे एक जिंदा लाश बनकर रह गए हैं।

ध्वनि प्रदूषण का कुप्रभाव सारी खुशियों पर पानी फेर गया। मैंने सुबह सारे कचरे को इकट्ठा करवाकर जलाया, सफाई करवाई, युवकों, बड़ों व बच्चों को बुलाकर समझाया कि जितना पैसा पटाखों में खर्च किया जाता है, उतने पैसों से हम बगीचा बनवा सकते हैं, जो हमें प्रदूषण से राहत देगा।

फिर किसी को जिंदा लाश नहीं बनना पड़ेगा। त्योहार खुशियाँ बाँटने के लिए होते हैं, दर्द देने के लिए नहीं। थोड़े लोगों में सहमति बनी। आज हमारी सोसायटी का बगीचा अन्य लोगों के लिए आदर्श बन चुका है। सबने पटाखे न फोड़ने का संकल्प तो नहीं किया किंतु नियमानुसार फोड़कर पर्व को मनाने का निर्णय अवश्य लिया।

व्यक्ति संस्कारों से सँवरता है, निखरता है। उसके व्यक्तित्व को गढ़ने का कार्य भी संस्कार ही करते हैं। किशोरावस्था और कुमारावस्था में छात्रों के लिए संस्कारगत मूल्यों की शिक्षा अनिवार्य है। इसका मानव जीवन के आचरण पर अत्यधिक प्रभाव पड़ता है।

कुछ नीतिपरक मूल्य मनुष्य को आदर्श नागरिक बनाने में सहायक होते हैं। इस संदर्भ में किसी महान मानव के चरित्र के ऊपर भी कुछ लिखा जा सकता है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

उदाहरणार्थ कुछ संकेत निम्नलिखित हैं।

  • जनमत का आदर करनेवाला मानव वास्तविक नायक बन जाता है। संसार के महान पुरुषों के चरित्र को आधार बनाकर इस कथन को अभिव्यक्ति दी जा सकती है।
  • आज शहरी जीवन में स्वार्थांधता इतनी बढ़ गई है कि अपनत्व का भाव लुप्त होता जा रहा है। संवेदना धुंधली होती जा रही है, मानवता कहीं न कहीं लुप्त होती जा रही हैं।

6. अब्राहम लिंकन

अमेरिका के एक गरीब परिवार में जन्म लेनेवाला बालक अब्राहम लिंकन जिसने बचपन में अत्यंत अभावपूर्ण परिस्थिति में परवरिश पायी। घर की टूटी खिड़कियाँ और टूटी हुई छत, ऊपर से बिजली का अभाव, बचपन में पिता के साथ मजदूरी करने को मजबूर भरपेट भोजन का अभाव उसे घेरे रहता था।

कहते हैं “जहाँ चाह वहाँ राह” कुशाग्र बुद्धि, बहादुर, हँसी मजाक करने वाला बालक मित्रों से पुस्तकें माँगकर पढ़ उसे लौटा देता। बुद्धि इतनी तीव्र कि पुस्तक का एक-एक शब्द उसकी याददाश्त का हिस्सा बन जाते।

बिजली के अभाव में सड़क के खंभे से आते प्रकाश को पढ़ने के लिए प्रयोग करते देख एक अमीर ने उसको पढ़ने के लिए पुस्तकें उपलब्ध कराई। उसकी लगन, मेहनत और प्रतिभा ने उसे महान वकील बना दिया।

अमेरिका का कलंक वहाँ की दास प्रथा थी। उससे मुक्ति दिलाने का काम अब्राहम लिंकन ने किया। इसी दृढ संकल्प शक्ति से वे एक दिन अमेरिका के राष्ट्रपति बने। यदि हमारे अंदर दृढ़ इच्छा शक्ति है तो सृजनात्मक मूल्य अपने आप विकसित होते हैं और हमें ऊँचाई प्रदान करते है।

हमारे बीच ऐसी प्रतिभाओं की कमी नहीं है। हमें नहीं भूलना चाहिए कि गरीबी की कोख से पले- बढ़े, संघर्षरत, दृढ़ इच्छा शक्ति वाले गाँव के एक किसान बालक लालबहादुर शास्त्री ने भारत का प्रधान मंत्री बनकर देश को “जय जवान जय किसान” का नारा दिया।

संत महात्माओं, साहित्यकारों, मनीषियों ने अपने विचारों को अभिव्यक्त कर जो अमृत संदेश दिया, उसे भुलाया नहीं जा सकता। उनकी प्रसिद्ध उक्तियाँ ही सूक्तियाँ कहलाती हैं। उन उक्तियों या सूक्तियों को आधार मान कर आप अपने विचार अभिव्यक्त कर सकते हैं। कुछ उदाहरण निम्न हैं।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

  1. “ढाई आखर प्रेम का, पढ़े सो पंडित होय।”
  2. है अंधेरी रात पर दीया जलाना कब मना है?
  3. “तभी समर्थ भाव है कि तारता हुए तरे, वही मनुष्य है कि जो मनुष्य के लिए मरे।’
  4. “नाश के दुःख से कभी, दबता नहीं निर्माण का सुख”
  5. “मन के हारे हार है, मन के जीते जीत।”

इन कहावतों में मानव जीवन का महान सत्य प्रस्तुत किया गया है। मानव जीवन में उसका मन ही उसकी सारी गतिविधियों का संचालन करता है। जीवन में अनुकूल -प्रतिकूल परिस्थितियों का आना – जाना लगा रहता है। यदि प्रतिकूल परिस्थितियों में हम अपना धैर्य बनाए रखें, तो हम उस पर विजय पाने में सफल रहते हैं। इसके विपरीत यदि हम में निराशा और अधीरता घर कर जाए तो साधन संपन्न रहने पर भी पराजय ही हमारे हाथ लगती है।

सच्ची तंदुरुस्ती और आत्मनिर्भरता हमारे विजय का मार्ग प्रशस्त करती है। खेल में कभी हार तो कभी जीत मिलती है लेकिन हार में यदि हम निराश हो जाएँ तो सब कुछ बिखर जाएगा। हमें हर परिस्थिति में यह मानकर चलना है।

“क्या हार में क्या जीत में किंचित नहीं भयभीत मैं संघर्ष-पथ पर जो मिले, यह भी सही वह भी सही “हार मानूँगा नहीं, वरदान माँगूगा नहीं” इस सूत्र को जीवन का आधार बनाकर एक साधारण परिवार में जन्म लेने वाले छत्रपती शिवाजी महाराज ने अपनी दृढ़ इच्छा शक्ति से आदिलशाही सुलतानों, पुर्तगालियों, मुगलों से लोहा लिया और विजय पाई। समाज के तमाम विरोध के बावजूद महात्मा ज्योतिबा फुले ने महाराष्ट्र में स्त्री शिक्षा के प्रचार-प्रसार का महान कार्य किया।

7. 26 जुलाई

वाह रे! मुंबई और वाह रे मुंबईकर! ऐसी ताकत हिम्मत और हौसले को प्रणाम करता हूँ वरना हिम्मत, हौसला और दृढ इच्छाशक्ति के बिना उस परिस्थिति से उबर पाना आसान न था। क्या छोटा क्या बड़ा? क्या अमीर क्या गरीब। एकता की एक श्रृखंला बन गई। दुनिया के सामने एक मिसाल – लोग कह उठे वाह रे! मुंबई और वाह रे मुंबईकर!

जब से मनुष्य ने विज्ञान की शक्ति पाकर प्रकृति से छेड़छाड़ प्रारंभ की तथा उसका दोहन प्रारंभ किया, तभी से वह प्राकृतिक सुखों से वंचित होता गया। वह भूल गया कि मूक दिखाई देने वाली प्रकृति की वक्रदृष्टि सर्वनाश का कारण बन सकती है। 26 जुलाई की विभिषिणा ने हम मुंबई वासियों को आगाह किया है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi रचना निबंध लेखन

हमें इस बात का ध्यान रखना होगा कि आज हमारे परिवेश में पर्यावरण का संरक्षण निहायत जरूरी है। प्लास्टीक की। थैलिया हमारे स्वास्थ्य एवं पर्यावरण के लिए बेहद हानिकारक हैं क्योंकि 60 फीसदी प्लास्टीक ही रिसाइकिल हो पाती है।

प्लास्टीक का यह कचरा ज्यादातर नालियों और सीवेज को ठप्प कर देता है, शेष समुद्र पर होने वाले अतिक्रमण और वृक्षों की कटाई ने भी अपनी भूमिका अदा की है। जिसके कारण ही वर्षा का जल समुद्र की खाड़ी में नहीं जा पाता और जल जमाव से लोग त्रस्त होते हैं।

पर्यावरण की सुरक्षा से ही इस समस्या को सुलझाया जा सकता है। वन रोपण तथा वृक्ष लगाने से यह समस्या कम हो सकती है। जनसंख्या वृद्धि पर भी हमें अंकुश लगाना होगा। कंक्रीट के जंगल की सीमा बांधनी होगी। समुद्र के अतिक्रमण को रोकना होगा। वरना सुख देने वाली यह प्रकृति हमें गटक जाएगी।

26 जुलाई 2005 की वह कहर भरी शाम। समुद्री तूफान और बरसात का सिलसिला जो आरंभ हुआ, पूरी रात चलता रहा। हर गली पानी से भर गई। पहली मंजिल तक पानी पहुंचा, रेलवे प्लेट फार्म डूब गए, सड़कों पर पानी, गाड़ियों के ऊपर से पानी बह रहा था। सब तरफ अफरा-तफरी का माहौल।

सबकी सोच, कि अब क्या होगा? कैसे निपटा जाय। इस मुसीबत से लोगों ने हिम्मत नहीं हारी, पूरी रात कौन कहाँ रहा पता नहीं? मंदिरों, मस्जिदों, चर्चों के दरवाजे खुल गए। लोगों ने शरण ली। सबने जिसकी जितनी ताकत थी एक – दूसरे को सँभाला, हिम्मत बँधाए रखा। करोड़ों का नुकसान हुआ।

रेलवे, बस सबकी सेवाएं ठप्प हो गईं। वाह रे! हिम्मत चौबीस घंटे बाद धीरे-धीरे सब कुछ सामान्य होने लगा। हालात को सामान्य बनाने में सबका योगदान रहा। यह थी हमारी एकता वर्गगत, जातिगत, धर्मगत, दलगत, विचारों से ऊपर। सर्वधर्म समभाव का ऐसा उदाहरण जिसे हम आज भी नमन करते हैं।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Hindi Yuvakbharati 11th Digest व्याकरण शब्द संपदा Notes, Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

(1) लिंग : जिस शब्द से संज्ञा के स्त्री या पुरुष होने का बोध होता है, उसे ‘लिंग’ कहते हैं। लिंग के मुख्यत: दो भेद माने गए हैं :

  • पुल्लिंग
  • स्त्रीलिंग

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

पुल्लिंग : पुल्लिंग संज्ञा के उस रूप को कहते हैं जिससे उसके पुरुष होने का बोध होता है। जैसे – राजेश, राकेश, प्रभाकर, चाँद, सूर्य, बैल, घोड़ा आदि।

स्त्रीलिंग : जिस शब्द से स्त्री होने का बोध होता है उसे स्त्रीलिंग कहते हैं। जैसे – राधा, शीला, घोड़ी, बकरी, मछली, मैना, तितली, कोयल आदि।

लिंग निर्णय : अंग्रेजी, मराठी, संस्कृत की अपेक्षा हिंदी में लिंग निर्णय की प्रक्रिया थोड़ी जटिल है। जहाँ तक प्राणिवाचक संज्ञा शब्दों का प्रश्न है उसमें कोई परेशानी नहीं है, लेकिन जहाँ अप्राणिवाचक संज्ञा शब्दों की बात आती है वहाँ कठिनाई बढ़ जाती है क्योंकि इसके लिए कोई विशेष नियम नहीं है। एक ही शब्द के अलग अर्थ होने से या अलग-अलग शब्दों के एक ही अर्थ होने से भी लिंग बदल जाते हैं। जैसे –

भिन्नार्थक शब्द : अप्राणिवाचक बहुत से शब्दों के समरूपी होने पर लिंग भेद होता है। जैसै :

शब्द  अर्थ  लिंग
कलम  लेखनी  स्त्रीलिंग
कलम  वृक्ष शाखा का कलम  पुल्लिंग
ओर  छोर  पुल्लिंग
ओर  तरफ  स्त्रीलिंग
सरकार  स्वामी  पुल्लिंग
सरकार  शासन चलानेवाली  स्त्रीलिंग
विधि  ब्रहमा  पुल्लिंग
विधि  प्रणाली  स्त्रीलिंग
हार  पराजय के अर्थ में  स्त्रीलिंग
हार  माला के अर्थ में  पुल्लिंग
सविता  सूर्य  पुल्लिंग
सविता  किसी लड़की का नाम  स्त्रीलिंग
तारा  नक्षत्र  पुल्लिंग
तारा  लड़की का नाम  स्त्रीलिंग

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

कुछ प्राणियों में लिंग का निर्णय व्यवहार से होता है। जैसे – बंदर, तीतर, चीता, बैल पुल्लिंग है जबकि – मछली, कोयल, मैना, गौरैया स्त्रीलिंग है।

अप्राणिवाचक में द्रवों के नाम, धातुओं, ग्रहों, वनस्पतियों, अनाजों, रत्नों, दिनों, स्थल भागों के नाम पुल्लिंग होते हैं। जब कि – भाववाचक संज्ञा (ट, ट, हट) कृदंत, नदियों के नाम, नक्षत्रों के नाम, तिथियों के नाम, पक्वानों के नाम आदि स्त्रीलिंग होते हैं।

लिंग परिवर्तन कर वाक्य फिर से लिखिए :

(1) बेटे ने काका से बातचीत की।
बेटी ने काकी से बातचीत की।

(2) शेर ने बकरे पर आक्रमण किया।
शेरनी ने बकरी पर आक्रमण किया।।

(3) बैल घास चर रहा है।
गाय घास चर रही है।

(4) पंडित का भाई पूजा कर रहा है।
पंडिताइन की बहन पूजा कर रही है।

(5) नायक अभिनय कर रहा है।
नायिका अभिनय कर रही है।

(6) कुत्ता भौंक रहा है।
कुतिया भौंक रही है।

(7) चाचा जी देव जैसे हैं।
चाची जी देवी जैसी हैं।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

(2) वचन : संज्ञा, सर्वनाम, विशेषण और क्रिया के जिस रूप से संख्या का बोध होता हैं, उसे वचन कहते हैं। हिंदी में दो वचन होते हैं।

  1. एकवचन
  2. बहुवचन

एकवचन : संज्ञा के अथवा शब्द के जिस रूप से एक ही व्यक्ति या वस्तु होने का ज्ञान हो उसे एकवचन कहते हैं। जैसे – बिल्ली, बिजली, लड़का, नदी, पुस्तक, घर आदि.

बहुवचन : संज्ञा अथवा शब्द के जिस रूप से उसके एक से अधिक होने का बोध होता है उसे बहुवचन कहते हैं। जैसे – बिल्लियाँ, लड़कियाँ, लड़के, घोड़े, बहुएँ आदि।

अपवाद : कुछ शब्दों में दोनों रूप समान होते है। जैसे – मामा, नाना, बाबा, पिता, योद्धा, युवा, आत्मा, देवता, जमाता।

सूचनानुसार – परिवर्तन

अधोरेखांकित शब्द का वचन परिवर्तित कर वाक्य फिर से लिखिए :

(1) उदा. लड़के विद्यालय जाते हैं।
उत्तर :
लड़का विद्यालय जाता है।

(2) नदी ने फसल को डुवो दिया।
उत्तर :
नदियों ने फसल को डुबो दिया।

(3) आप कहाँ जा रहे हैं?
उत्तर :
तुम कहाँ जा रहे हो?

(4) बकरी घास चर रही है।
उत्तर :
बकरियाँ घास चर रही हैं।

(5) नदियों ने फसलों को हरा-भरा कर दिया।
उत्तर :
नदी ने फसल को हरा-भरा कर दिया।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

(3) विलोम विरुद्धार्थी शब्द : जो शब्द अर्थ की दृष्टि से एक-दूसरे के विरोधी होते हैं उन्हें विलोम, विपरीतार्थी या विरुद्धार्थी शब्द कहते हैं।

  • निम्न x उच्च
  • धनी x निर्धन
  • विष x अमृत
  • अर्थ x अनर्थ
  • उदय x अस्त
  • प्रात: x सायं
  • सजीव x निर्जीव
  • सदाचार x दुराचार
  • आय x व्यय
  • आदान x प्रदान
  • स्वर्ग x नरक
  • मान x अपमान
  • सत्य x असत्य
  • सज्जन x दुर्जन
  • गुण x अवगुण
  • शुभ x अशुभ
  • उचित x अनुचित
  • अनुकूल x प्रतिकूल
  • पक्ष x विपक्ष
  • उपस्थित x अनुपस्थित
  • एक x अनेक
  • आस्तिक x नास्तिक
  • आदर x निरादर
  • उन्नति x अवनति
  • सफलता र असफलता
  • सौभाग्य x दुर्भाग्य
  • आदि x अंत
  • नवीन x प्राचीन
  • उदार x अनुदार
  • लौकिक x अलौकिक
  • स्मृति – विस्मृति
  • आयात x निर्यात
  • शिक्षित x अशिक्षित
  • उत्तीर्ण x अनुत्तीर्ण
  • यश x अपयश
  • सुलभ x दुर्लभ Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा
  • प्रत्यक्ष x परोक्ष
  • खुशबू x बदबू
  • सार्थक x निरर्थक
  • मुख्य x गौण
  • समर्थन x विरोध
  • उत्थान x पतन
  • पंडित x मूर्ख
  • निर्माण x विनाश
  • संयोग x वियोग
  • उपकार x अपकार
  • साक्षर x निरक्षर
  • सूक्ष्म x स्थूल
  • बंजर x उपजाऊ
  • कृतज्ञ x कृतघ्न
  • आलस्य x उद्यम
  • साकार x निराकार
  • बुराई x भलाई
  • क्रोध x शांति
  • रक्षक x भक्षक
  • स्तुति x निंदा
  • वीर x कायर
  • वरदान – अभिशाप
  • रुग्ण x स्वस्थ
  • मानव x दानव
  • महान x क्षुद्र
  • सम x विषम
  • मधुर x कटु
  • महात्मा x दुरात्मा
  • कनिष्ठ x ज्येष्ठ
  • आकाश x पाताल

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

(4) पर्यायवाची शब्द :

  • असभ्य – अशिष्ट, गँवार, उजड्ड
  • कहानी – कथा, अख्यायिका, किस्सा
  • बुद्धि – मति, मेधा, प्रज्ञा, अक्ल
  • बारिश – वर्षा, बरसात, वृष्टि
  • पति – कांत, स्वामी, वर, भर्ता
  • वसंत – मधुऋतु, ऋतुराज, पिकमित्र
  • अनोखा – अनूठा, अनुपम, अलौकिक
  • थोड़ा – अल्प, रंच, कम
  • मृत्यु – निधन, देहांत, मौत
  • सुंदर – चारु, रम्य, ललाम
  • पत्नी – कांता, वधू, भार्या

(5) अनेक शब्दों के लिए एक शब्द :

  • जिस पर विश्वास किया जा सके – विश्वसनीय
  • जिसकी उपमा न दी जा सके – अनुपम
  • सब कुछ जाननेवाला – सर्वज्ञ
  • जो कभी बूढ़ा न हो – अजर
  • जो नियम के अनुसार न हो – अनियमित
  • जिसका कोई अंत न हो – अनंत
  • जो देखने योग्य हो – दर्शनीय
  • जो दूर की सोचता हो – दूरदर्शी
  • जो मीठा बोलता हो – मृदुभाषी
  • अनुकरण करने योग्य – अनुकरणीय
  • किए हुए उपकार को न माननेवाला – कृतघ्न
  • काम में लगा रहने वाला – कर्मठ
  • जिसे कहा न जा सके – अकथनीय
  • जो कम बोलता हो – मितभाषी
  • जिसे पाना कठिन हो – दुर्लभ

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

(6) भिन्नार्थक शब्द : कुछ शब्दों के प्रयोग कई अर्थों में होते हैं। उनका अर्थ वाक्य में प्रयोग से ही निश्चित हो सकता है।

  • अंबर – आकाश, कपड़ा
  • अंतर – हृदय, फर्क
  • आदि – आरंभ, इत्यादि
  • अली – सखी, पंक्ति
  • काल – समय, मृत्यु
  • कनक – सोना, धतूरा
  • तीर – बाण, तट
  • पट – कपड़ा, दरवाजा
  • पृष्ठ – (किताब का) पन्ना, पीठ
  • भेद – प्रकार, रहस्य
  • हरि – ईश्वर, सिंह
  • हार – फूलों की माला, हारना
  • गति – दशा, चाल
  • मित्र – साथी, सूर्य
  • हल – खेत जोतने का औजार, समाधान
  • स्नेह – तेल, प्रेम

(7) शब्द-युग्म : शब्दों का वह जोड़ा होता है जो देखने और सुनने में एक जैसे होते हैं अथवा मिलते-जुलते हैं लेकिन वर्तनी में कहीं न कहीं कोई अंतर अवश्य होता है। इस प्रकार वर्तनी की भिन्नता अथवा उसमें थोड़ा-सा परिवर्तन अर्थ में बहुत बड़ा अंतर उत्पन्न कर देते हैं। अत: इन्हें जानना व समझना जरूरी हो जाता है। यहाँ कुछ शब्द-युग्म दिए गए हैं।

अँगना : आँगन।
वाक्य: गाँव के घर में अँगना/आँगन का बहुत महत्त्व हैं।

अंगना : रमणी या सुंदर स्त्री।
वाक्य: अँगना में अंगना के पायल को छम-छम सुनाई दे रही थी।

अन्न : अनाज, खाद्य पदार्थ।।
वाक्यः किसान खेतों में अन्न उपजाते हैं।

अन्य : दूसरा या पराया।
वाक्य: इस काम को कोई अन्य व्यक्ति नहीं करेगा।

अगम : कठिन, दुर्गम।
वाक्यः ईश्वर को संतों ने अगम बताया है।

आगम : प्राप्ति, आय:
वाक्यः उसके पास अब कोई आगम नहीं है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

अवलंब : आश्रय, सहारा।
वाक्य: उसके पति की मृत्यु के साथ ही उसका अवलंब टूट गया।

अविलंब : तुरंत, शीघ्र।
वाक्यः इस कार्य को अविलंब करना है।

अंत : समाप्ति।
वाक्य: बादशाह औरंगजेब की मृत्यु के साथ ही मुगल राज्य का अंत हो गया।

अंत्य : अंतिम।
वाक्यः हिंदुओं की अंत्य विधि श्मशान में होती है।

अनल : आग।
वाक्यः अनल सब कुछ जला देता है।

अनिल : हवा।
वाक्य: ऊँचाई पर अनिल का दबाव कम हो जाता है।

अश्व : घोड़ा।
वाक्य: चेतक एक महान अश्व था।

अश्म : पत्थर।
वाक्य: अश्म से ठोकर खाकर वह गिर पड़ा।

अमित : बहुत, असीम।
वाक्य: लैला का मजनू से अमित प्रेम था।

अमीत : अमित्र, शत्रु।
वाक्य: इंसानियत के पुजारी अमीत को भी गले लगाते हैं।

आदि : आरंभ, शुरू या इत्यादि।
वाक्य: आदिकाल से ही भारतीय संस्कृति संसार में श्रेष्ठ रही है।

आदी : अभ्यस्त।
वाक्य: वह सुबह जल्दी उठने का आदी है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

आसन : बैठने की छोटी चटाई। वाक्य: यह पिता जी का आसन है।
आसन्न : निकट आया हुआ, तुरंत। वाक्य: उसका परीक्षा-काल आसन्न है।

इति : समाप्ति, अंत।
वाक्य: इसकी यही इति है।

ईति : विपत्ति, बाधा।
वाक्यः बेचारे मोहन के पिता की मौत होते ही उसके ईती का आरंभ हो गया।

उन : ‘उस’ सर्वनाम का बहुवचन।
वाक्य: उन लोगों को शादी में जाना है।

ऊन : भेड़ आदि के बाल।
वाक्य: शीत से बचने के लिए ऊनी वस्त्रों का प्रयोग होता है।

उपकार : भलाई।
वाक्य: यह उपकार का जमाना नहीं है।

अपकार : बुराई।
वाक्यः किसी का अपकार करके तुम्हें क्या मिलने वाला है ?

कंगाल : गरीब।
वाक्यः भूकंप आने से भुज के लोग कंगाल हो गए।

कंकाल : हड्डियों का ढाँचा।
वाक्य: बीमारी से वह कंकाल बन चुका है।

कलि : युग, कलह, झगड़ा।
वाक्यः कलियुग में सब कुछ उल्टा होता है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

कली : अधखिला फूल।
वाक्यः फूल बनने से पहले कली नहीं मसलनी चाहिए।

कहा : कहना का भूतकाल।। वाक्यः उसने कहा था।
कहाँ : स्थान बोधक अव्यय। वाक्यः आप कहाँ जा रहे हैं?

कुल : वंश, परिवार, पूर्ण।
वाक्यः (अ) दो संख्याओं को जोड़ने पर हमें कुलयोग ज्ञात होता है।
(ब) भगवान राम रघुकुल में जन्में थे।

कूल : तट, किनारा।
वाक्यः श्याम यमुना के कूल पर बंसी बजाते थे।

कुजन : बुरे लोग।
वाक्यः कुजनों के साथ रहने से नुकसान होता है।

कूजन : पक्षियों की मधुर ध्वनि या कलरव।
वाक्यः पक्षियों के कूजन से सवेरा होने का आभास हुआ।

किला : गढ़।
वाक्यः सिंहगढ़ का किला छत्रपति शिवाजी महाराज ने जीत लिया।

कीला : छूटा, बड़ी कील।
वाक्य: मैंने यह कीला अपनी जमीन में गाड़ा है।

ग्रह : सूर्य, चंद्र आदि।
वाक्य: हमारी संस्कृति में नौ ग्रह पूजे जाते हैं।

गृह : घर।
वाक्य: सोमवार को मेरा गृह प्रवेश हुआ।

कि : समुच्चयबोधक अव्यय।
वाक्यः राम के पिता ने कहा कि वह आलस्य छोड़ दें।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

की : करना क्रिया का भूतकाल। संबंध कारक चिह्न।
वाक्य : मैंने पढ़ाई पूरी की। गाँव की नदियाँ बलखाती हुई बह रही है।

चिर : दीर्घ – बड़ा या हमेशा/शाश्वत।
वाक्यः चिरकाल से चली आई भारतीय संस्कृति महान है।

चीर : वस्त्र / कपड़ा।
वाक्य: द्रौपदी का चीर हरण किया गया था।

तरणी : नौका।
वाक्यः रामजी ने केवट की तरि से गंगा नदी पार की।

तरणि : सूर्य
वाक्य: सब्जियों में तरी ज्यादा होने से स्वाद बिगड़ गया।

तरंग : लहर।
वाक्य: समंदर की तरंगें भयानक होती जा रही थीं।

तुरंग : घोड़ा।
वाक्यः तुरंग पर सवार सैनिक जंग में महत्त्वपूर्ण भूमिका अदा करते थे।

नित : रोज, प्रतिदिन।
वाक्य: नित प्रात:काल उठकर टहलना स्वास्थ्य के लिए लाभदायक है।

नीत : प्राप्त, लाया हुआ।
वाक्य: हमारे देश में पर्दा प्रथा मुगलों द्वारा नीत है।

नियत : तय, निश्चित।
वाक्य: तुम्हें नियत समय पर ही वहाँ पहुँचना है।

नीयत : इच्छा, इरादा, मंशा।
वाक्यः इस मामले में तुम्हारी नीयत में खोट नजर आ रही है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

दिन : दिवस।
वाक्यः बुरे दिन में कोई मदद नहीं करता।

दीन : गरीब।
वाक्यः मुझ दीन के रक्षक दीनानाथ हैं।

देव : देवता, सुर।
वाक्य: भारत में अनेक देव पूजे जाते हैं।

दैव : भाग्य, नसीब।
वाक्य: आलसी हमेशा दैव-दैव पुकारता है।

प्रसाद : ईश्वरीय कृपा। वाक्य: मैं भगवान का प्रसाद पाकर धन्य हो गया। प्रासाद : महल।
वाक्यः राजा भव्य प्रासाद में रहता था।

परिणाम : फल, नतीजा।
वाक्यः चोरी का परिणाम हमेशा बुरा होता है।

परिमाण : मात्रा, माप।
वाक्य: यह दवा किस परिमाण में लेनी है?

पुर : नगर, शहर।
वाक्यः रघुवीर जी की बहू सीतापुर गई।

पूर : पूर्णत्व, बाढ़, अधिकता।
वाक्य : मोहन की थोड़ी-सी कमाई से घर-खर्च पूरा नहीं पड़ता था।

प्रणाम : नमस्कार, सलाम।
वाक्य : हमें बड़ों को प्रणाम करना चाहिए।

प्रमाण : सबूत।
वाक्य : इस समय मेरे पास अपनी बात का कोई प्रमाण नहीं है।

प्रहर : याम, पहर (तीन घंटे का समय)।
वाक्य : रात्रि के तीसरे प्रहर में पूरी तरह सन्नाटा छा जाता है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

प्रहार : आघात या चोट।
वाक्य: महाराणाप्रताप के प्रहार से मुगल सेना तितर-बितर हो गई।

पर : पंख, परंतु।
वाक्यः मोर के पर रखना शुभकारी होता है।

पार : किनारा, मंजिल तक पहुँचना।
वाक्यः मेरा घर नदी के उस पार है।

फुट : बारह इंच की माप।
वाक्य: इसकी लंबाई छ: फुट है।

फूट : मतभेद, बैर, अलगाव।
वाक्य: इस चुनाव में प्रत्येक दल में फूट पड़ी और बागी उम्मीदवार निर्दलीय चुनाव लड़े।

बलि : बलिदान, नैवेद्य।
वाक्य: बकरी ईद में बकरे की बलि दी जाती है।

बली : बलवान, वीर।
वाक्यः तन के साथ-साथ मन का भी बली होना जरूरी है।

बट : रास्ता।
वाक्यः पत्नी अपने पति की बाट जोह रही थी।

बाँट : भाग, हिस्सा।
वाक्य: मक्खन बाँट में बिल्लियों का नुकसान तय है।

बहु : बहुत, अधिक।
वाक्यः मेरा बहु प्रतीक्षित सपना पूरा हुआ।

बहू : पुत्रवधू, विवाहिता ली।
वाक्यः सास और बहू को टक्कर जगत प्रसिद्ध है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

भिड़ : ततैया, लड़ना।
वाक्य: दोनों पक्षों के सैनिक आपस में भिड़ गए।

भीड़ : मजमा, जनसमूह।
वाक्य: मेले की भीड़ में खो जाने का अंदेशा रहता है।

बास : गंध।
वाक्य: कचरे के डिब्बे से बहुत ही बास आ रही थी।

बाँस : एक वनस्पती
वाक्य: बाँस बहुत ही उपयोगी वनस्पती है।

भवन : घर, महल।
वाक्य: जयपुर में शानदार भवन है।

भुवन : संसार, जग।
वाक्यः सारे भुवन में महँगाई की मार है।

मूल : जड़, नींव।
वाक्य: दोनों परिवारों के विवाद के मूल में एक-दूसरे के प्रति नफरत है।

मूल्य : कीमत।
वाक्य: यह घड़ी काफी मूल्यवान है।

राज : राज्य, शासन।
वाक्य: महात्मा गांधीजी देश में रामराज लाना चाहते थे।

राज़ : भेद, रहस्य।
वाक्यः इस खंडहर में गहरा राज़ छिपा हुआ है।

शिला : पत्थर, पाषाण।
वाक्य: सम्राट अशोक के जमाने में शिलालेखों का विशेष महत्त्व था।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

शीला : सुशील।
वाक्य: यह बड़ी सुशीला पुत्री है।

सास : पति या पत्नी की माँ।।
वाक्यः सास-बहू में झगड़े होते रहते हैं।

साँस : श्वास।
वाक्य: जब तक साँस चल रही है तब तक हमें संघर्ष करना है।

सुर : देवता, लय।
वाक्यः (अ) सुर में गाना एक साधना है।
(ब) बृहस्पतिजी सुरों के गुरु हैं।

सूर : सूर्य, अंधा।
वाक्यः मोहन सूर है लेकिन उसकी आवाज में जादू है।

सर्ग : काव्य का अध्याय।
वाक्यः कामायनी को सर्गों में विभक्त किया गया है।

स्वर्ग : देवताओं का निवास, जन्नत।
वाक्य : अच्छे लोग मृत्यु के बाद सीधे स्वर्ग जाते हैं।

शुक्ति : सीप।
वाक्यः शुक्ति में मोती बनता है।

सूक्ति : अच्छी उक्ति।
वाक्य: संतों की सूक्ति हमेशा प्रेरक होती है।

सुधि : स्मरण, याद।
वाक्य: परदेश जाने के बाद पति ने पत्नी की सुधि नहीं ली।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

सुधी : विद्वान।
वाक्य: सुधी जनों की संगत में हमेशा सुख मिलता है।

सकल : सब, संपूर्ण।
वाक्य: गेहूँ की सकल उत्पाद का पच्चीस प्रतिशत पंजाब में होता है।

शक्ल : सूरत, चेहरा टुकड़ा।
वाक्य: तेजाब फेंककर उसकी शक्ल को बिगाड़ दिया गया।

शुल्क : फीस, चंदा।
वाक्यः रमा विद्यालय में बच्चे का शुल्क जमा करने गई है।

शुक्ल : उज्ज्वल, शुद्ध पक्ष।
वाक्यः शुक्ल पक्ष के अंतिम दिन पूर्णिमा होती है।

(8) उपसर्ग : जो शब्दांश किसी शब्द के प्रारंभ में जुड़कर शब्द के अर्थ को प्रभावित करते हैं उन्हें उपसर्ग कहा जाता है।
उदा. देश – स्वदेश, परदेश, उपदेश

हिंदी में प्रयुक्त होने वाले कुछ, उपसर्ग इस प्रकार है :
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा 1
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा 2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा 3
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा 4

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

(9) प्रत्यय : कुछ शब्दांश शब्दों के अंत में जुड़कर उनके अर्थ में परिवर्तन लाते हैं उन्हें प्रत्यय कहते हैं।
उदा. – जल + ज = जलज, जल + द = जलद
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा 5
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा 6

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

(10) कृदंत : धातु में कृत प्रत्यय लगने से बनने वाला शब्द कृदंत कहलाता है।
जैसे-
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा 7

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

तद्धित : संज्ञा, सर्वनाम, विशेषण अथवा अव्यय के अंत में प्रत्यय लगाकर बने शब्द तद्धित शब्द कहलाते हैं।
जैसे –
संज्ञा शब्द – तद्धित शब्द
सोना – सुनार, सुनहरा
मुख – मुखिया, मौखिक …. आदि

सर्वनाम शब्द – तद्धित शब्द
अपना – अपनापन, अपनत्व
निज – निजत्व …. आदि

विशेषण शब्द – तद्धित शब्द
मीठा – मिठाई, मिठास
एक – एकता, इकहरा …… आदि

अव्यय शब्द – तद्धित शब्द
पीछे – पिछला
अवश्य – आवश्यक
बहुत – बहुतायत …… आनि

(11) तत्सम शब्द : जो शब्द हिंदी में संस्कृत भाषा से बिना किसी परिवर्तन के ले लिए गए है उन्हें ‘तत्सम शब्द’ कहा जाता है।
उदा. : नित्य, विद्वान, प्रात:, शनैः शनैः, ज्ञान, अक्षर, सूर्य, गृह, ग्राम …… आदि।

(12) तद्भव शब्द : समय और परिस्थिति के कारण संस्कृत के शब्दों में परिवर्तन आता गया और आज व्यवहार में प्रयुक्त हैं ऐसे शब्द तद्भव शब्द कहलाते हैं।
जैसे –

तत्सम शब्द  तद्भव शब्द
अंगुली  उंगली
अश्रु  आँसू
काक  कौआ
गृह  घर
पुत्र  पुत
कोकिल  कोयल
हस्ती  हाथी
जिह्वा  जीभ
दुग्ध  दूध
भ्राता  भाई
श्राप  शाप
मुख  पूँह
अग्नि  आग
अग्र  आगे
गर्दभ  गधा
चंद्र  चाँद
पितृ  पिता
कृष्ण Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा  किशन
हस्त  हाथ
बिंदु  बूंद
भगिनी  बहन
क्षेत्र  खेत
सप्त  सात
मेघ  मेह
रात्रि  रात
श्वास  साँस
शय्या  सेज
मूल्य  मोल
धैर्य  धीरज
कृषक  किसान
छिद्र  छेद
ज्येष्ठ  जेठ
दूर्वा  दूब
दु:ख  दुख
पद  पैर
पीत  पीला
पुच्छ Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा  पूँछ
भिक्षा  भीख
भद्र  भला
सूत्र  सूत
लक्ष्मण  लखन
वर्ष  बरस
सूर्य  सूरज
शर्करा  शक्कर
श्वसुर  ससुर
श्वश्रू  सास
निष्ठ  मीठा
रत्न  रतन
घट  घड़ा
चौत्र  चत
तृण  तिनका
दीप  दीया
पक्षी  पंछी
पुष्प  फूल
पुष्कर  पोखर
मयुर  मोर
मृतिका  मिट्टी
रक्षा Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा  राखी
लौह  लोहा
व्याघ्र  बाघ
बक  बगुला
खीर  क्षीर

विदेशी शब्द : अरबी, फारसी, अंग्रेजी या अन्य किसी भी दूसरे देश की भाषा के शब्द जिनका हिंदी में प्रयोग किया जाता है उन्हें विदेशी शब्द कहते हैं।

जैसे : डॉक्टर, राज़, इलाज, रेल्वे, सिग्नल, इशारा, दीदार, आरमान, शक्ल …. आदि।

मानक वर्तनी :

किसी भी भाषा के दो प्रमुख तत्त्व होते हैं।

  • व्याकरण
  • लिपि

लिपि का एक पक्ष है सामान्य और विभिन्न ध्वनियों के पृथक-पृथक, प्रतीक -वर्णों की वृद्धि, उनका परस्पर आकार भेद, लिखावट में सरलता, स्थान लघुता स्वं प्रयत्नलाघव, जिससे भाषा दुरूहता समाप्त होती है। लिपि का दूसरा पक्ष है वर्तनी (Spelling) एक शब्द को प्रकट करने के लिए अलग-अलग अक्षरों का प्रयोग वर्तनी को कठिन बना देता है। देवनागरी लिपि में यह दोष सबसे कम है, फिर भी कुछ विशेष कठिनाइयाँ हैं।

इन सभी कठिनाइयों को दूर कर हिंदी की वर्तनी में एकरूपता लाने के लिए भारत सरकार के शिक्षा मंत्रालय ने 1961 में एक विशेषज्ञ समिति नियुक्त की थी।

समिति ने अप्रैल 1962 में अपनी अंतिम सिफारिशें प्रस्तुत की, जिन्हें सरकार ने स्वीकृत किया। यह सुधार प्रायः टंकण लिपि और संगणक की सुविधानुसार किया गया। 1967 में “हिंदी वर्तनी मानकीकरण” नामक पुस्तिका में इसकी व्याख्या और उदाहरण विस्तार से प्रकाशित किया गया है।

वर्तनी संबंधी कुछ नियम इस प्रकार है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

(1) संयुक्त वर्ण

(क) खड़ी पाई वाले व्यंजन:

खड़ी पाई वाले व्यंजनों (म्दहेदहाहू) का संयुक्त रूप खड़ी को हटाकर ही बनाया जाना चाहिए,

जैसे – ख्याति, लग्न, विघ्न, कच्चा, छज्जा, सज्जा, नगण्य उल्लेख, कुत्ता, पथ्य, ध्वनि, प्यास, न्यास, डिब्बा, सभ्य, रम्य, शय्या, राष्ट्रीय, त्र्यंबक, व्यास, स्वीकृत श्लोक, यक्ष्मा, प्रज्ञा।

(ख) अन्य व्यंजन:

(अ) क और फ के संयुक्ताक्षर : पक्का, दफ्तर, रफ्तार, चक्का आदि की तरह बनाए जाएँ, न कि पक्का, दफ्तर की तरह। इसमें फ और क की बाहों को गोला न कर सीधा कर दिया जाता है। (आ) ङ्, ट, ठ, ड, ढ, द और ह के संयुक्ताक्षर हलंत ( ) चिह्न लगाकर ही बताए जाए। वाङ्मय लट्टू, बुड्ढा, विद्या, चिह्न, ब्रह्मा, ब्राह्मण, उद्यम लट्ठा आदि।

(इ) श्र का प्रचलित रूप ही मान्य होगा। इसे श के रूप में नहीं लिखा जाएगा। त + र के संयुक्त रूप के लिए त्र और र दोनों रूपों के प्रयोग की छूट हैं। किंतु क्र को कर के रूप में नहीं लिखा जाएगा।

(ई) हलंत चिह्नयुक्त वर्ण से बनने वाले संयुक्ताक्षर के द्वितीय व्यंजन के साथ इ की मात्रा का प्रयोग संबंधित व्यंजन के तत्काल पूर्व ही किया जाएगा, न कि पूरे युग्म से पूर्व जैसे कुट्टिम द्वितीय, को कुटिम, द्वितीय, बुद्धिमान, चिह्नित आदि को स्वीकारा जाएगा।

(उ) संस्कृत में संयुक्ताक्षर पुरानी शैली में भी लिखे जा सकेंगे, जैसे – संयुक्त, चिह्न, विद्या, विद्वान, वृद्ध, अट्ट, द्वितीय, बुद्धि, शुद्धि आदि।
(नियम 2) क और फ के बाहों की गोलाई अंग को काटकर या हटाकर)
क – मुक्त, पक्का, चक्कर, टक्कर, शक्कर।
फ- मुफ्त, दफ्तर, रफ्तार।
(नियम 3) ट, ड, द, ह को हलंत करके) लट्टू, चट्टान, इकट्ठा, पट्ठा, बुड्ढा, लड्डू, शुद्ध, वृद्ध, बुद्धिमान, उद्योग, गद्य, पद्य, खाद्य, प्रसिद्ध अद्भुत, ब्रह्म, चिह्न, ब्राह्मण।
(नियम 4) संयुक्त वर्णाक्षर के साथ ‘इ’ की मात्रा का प्रयोग हलंत चिह्नयुक्त वर्ण से बननेवाले संयुक्ताक्षर के द्वितीय वर्ण के तत्काल पूर्व किया जाता है। जैसे – बुद्धि, शुद्धि, चिह्नित, द्वितीय, द्विगुणित, चिट्ठियाँ, छुट्टियाँ, सिद्धि, वृद्धि आदि।
(नियम 5) खड़ी पाई को हटाकरः

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

खड़ी पाई वाले व्यंजन के संयुक्ताक्षर :

  • ख : ख्याति
  • ण : नगण्य प : प्यार
  • ल : उल्लेख ग : मग्न
  • त : पत्ता ब : ब्यौरा,
  • ष : राष्ट्र ग : नग्न
  • थ : पथ्य
  • भ : सभ्य स : स्वाद
  • घ : विघ्न ध : ध्यान
  • म : रम्य य : त्र्यंबक
  • च : अच्छा न : न्याय
  • म : गम्य श : श्लोक
  • ज : लज्जान : अन्न
  • य : शय्या क्ष : लक्ष्य

(2) विभक्ति चिह्न : (कारक चिह्न)

(क) हिंदी के विभक्ति चिह्न सभी प्रकार के संज्ञा शब्दों में प्रतिपदिक से पृथक लिखे जाय,
जैसे – राम ने, राम को, राम से, सभी ने, सभी को, सभी से आदि। सर्वनाम शब्दों में विभक्ति चिह्न मिलाकर लिखे जाते हैं।
जैसे -उसने, उसको, उसपर आदि।

(ख) सर्वनामों के साथ यदि दो विभक्ति चिह्न है उसमें पहला मिलाकर और दूसरा अलग से लिखा जाय।
जैसे – उसके लिए- इसमें से, आदि।

(ग) सर्वनाम और विभक्ति ‘ही’ ‘तक’ आदि का प्रयोग हो तो विभक्ति को अलग लिखा जाए।
जैसे – आप ही के लिए, मुझ तक को।

(3) क्रियापद : संयुक्त क्रियाओं में सभी अंगभूत क्रियाएँ पृथक लिखी जाएँ। जैसे- पढ़ा करता है, आ सकता है, खेला करेगा, नाचता रहेगा, चढ़ते ही जा रहे हैं, बढ़ते चले आ रहे हैं इत्यादि।

(4) हाइफन (-) हाइफन का विधान स्पष्टता के लिए किया जाता है।

(क) द्वंद्व समास में पदों के बीच हाइफन रखा जाए यथाः
राम-लक्ष्मण, माता-पिता, शिव-पार्वती, देख-रेख, चाल-चलन, हँसी-मजाक, पढ़ना लिखना, खाना-पीना, खेलना-कूदना, स्त्री-पुरुष इत्यादि।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

(ख) ‘सा’ ‘जैसा’ आदि से पूर्व हाइफन रखा जाये। जैसे -तुम-सा, राम-जैसा, चाकू-से तीखे, चलने। जैसे – आदि.

(ग) तत्पुरुष समास में हाइफन का प्रयोग तभी किया जाय जहाँ पर हाइफन के बिना भ्रम होने की संभावना हो। अन्यथा हाइफन का प्रयोग नहीं होगा।
जैसे – भू-तत्व.
सामान्यत: तत्पुरुष समास में हाइफन के प्रयोग की आवश्यकता नहीं होती जैसे – रामराज्य, राजकुमार, गंगाजल, ग्रामवासी, आत्महत्या, राजमाता, आदि। इसी तरह अ-नख (बिना नख का) में हाइफन न लगाने से इसका अर्थ बदल कर क्रोध हो जाएगा। अ-नति (नम्रता की कमी), अनति (थोड़ा) अ-परस (जिसे किसीने छुआ न हो) – अपरस – (एक चर्मरोग), भू-तत्व (पृथ्वी का तत्त्व) भूतत्त्व (भूत होने का भाव) आदि समस्त पदों की स्थिति विशेष होती है जहाँ हाइफन का प्रयोग किया जाता है।
(घ) कठिन संधियों से बचने के लिए भी हाइफन का प्रयोग किया जाता है। जैसे -द्वि-अक्षर, द्वि-अर्थक आदि।
(च) स्पष्टीकरण के लिए भी हाइफन का प्रयोग किया जाता है। जैसे – उदाहरणार्थ – यथा-आदि

विशेष अभ्यास हेतु

(क) हाइफन वाले शब्द : उषा-सा, एक-सा, घबराया-सा, छोटा-सा, जरा-सा, थोड़ा-सा, फूल-सा, रात-सा, साधारण-सा, हल्का सा, धक-सा आदि।

(ख) दवदव समास : आठ-दस, इधर-उधर, एक- दूसरा करता-धोती, खान पान, खेल-कद, नाच-गाना, रात-दिन, गोरा-चिट्टा, घर-परिवार, माता-पिता, जेठानी-देवरानी, भाई-बहन, दिन-रात, टूटा-फूटा, नहाना-धोना, बोल-चाल, हाथ-पैर, लाभ -हानि, भैया-भाभी, काका-काकी, रूप -रेखा आदि।

(ग) द्विरुक्त शब्द : आगे-आगे, कच-कच, खी-खी, जगह – जगह, तरह -तरह, धीरे-धीरे, नन्हा-नन्हा, बड़े-बड़े, भिन्न-भिन्न, रोज-रोज, शिव-शिव, सच-सच, हिला -हिला, बीच- बीच , गरम- गरम, छोटी-छोटी, मोटी-मोटी, सर-सर इत्यादी।

(घ) अन्य : जैसे-ही, भू-स्वामित्व, भू-सर्वेक्षण, भू-दान, मन-ही-मन, आदि।

(5) अव्यय : तक, साथ, आदि अव्यय सदा अलग लिखे जाएँ।।

जैसे – आपके साथ, यहाँ तक । हिंदी में आह, ओह ऐ, ही, तो, सो, भी न, जब, कब यहाँ, वहाँ, कहाँ, सदा, क्या, पड़ी, जी, तक, भर, मात्र, केवल, किंतु, परंतु, लेकिन, मगर, चाहे, या अथवा तथा आदि अनेक प्रकार के भावों को बोध करानेवाले अव्यय हैं। कुछ अव्ययों के आगे विभक्ति चिह्न भी आते है।

जैसे – अब से, तब से, यहाँ से, वहाँ से, कहाँ से, सदा से आदि। नियमानुसार अव्यय हमेशा अलग लिखे जाने चाहिए। जैसे – आप ही के लिए, मुझ तक को, आप के साथ, गज भर, रात भर. वह इतना, भर कर दे, मुझे जाने तो दो, काम भी नहीं बना, पचास रुपए मात्र है।

सम्मानार्थक श्री और जी अव्यय भी पृथक लिखे जाए। जैसे – श्री राम, महात्मा जी, माता जी, पिता जी, आदि। समस्त पदों में प्रति, मात्र, यथा, आदि अलग न लिखकर एक साथ लिखना चाहिए। जैसे – प्रतिदिन, प्रतिक्षण, प्रतिशत, मानवमात्र, निमित्तमात्र, यथासमय, यथायोग्य, यथोचित, यथासंभव आदि।

यह नियम है कि समास होने पर समस्त पद एक ही माना जाता है अत: उसे पृथक न लिखकर एक साथ ही लिखा जाना चाहिए।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

(6) श्रुतिमूलक :

(क) श्रुतिमूलक ‘य’ ‘व’ का प्रयोग विकल्प से होता है, वहाँ न किया जाए अर्थात किए – किये, नई – नयी, हुआ-हुवा, आदि में पहले वाले सकारात्मक रूप को ही स्वीकारा जाना चाहिए। यह नियम विशेषण, क्रियाविशेषण अव्यय आदि के सभी रूपों और स्थितियों में लागू माना जाए। जैसे – दिखाए गए, राम के लिए, पुस्तक लिए हुए, नई दिल्ली आदि।

(ख) जहाँ ‘य’ श्रुतिमूलक शब्द का मूल रूप होता है वहाँ वैकल्पिक, श्रुतिमूलक स्वरात्मक परिवर्तन की आवश्यकता नहीं होती । यहाँ व्याकरण के अनुसार परिवर्तन नहीं होना चाहिए। जैसे – स्थायी, अव्ययी भाव, दायित्व आदि को स्थाई, अव्यई भाव, दाइत्व नहीं लिखा जा सकता।

(7) अनुस्वार या अनुनासिकता के चिह्न (चंद्र बिंदु)

अनुस्वार ()और अनुनासिकता चिह्न (*) दोनो प्रचलित रहेंगे।

(क) संयुक्त व्यंजन के लय में जहाँ पंचमाक्षर के बाद सवर्गीय शेष चार वर्ण में से कोई वर्ण हो तो एकरूपता और मुद्रण/ लेखन की सुविधा के लिए अनुस्वार का ही प्रयोग किया जाना चाहिए। जैसे – गंगा, चंचल, ठंडा, संपादक आदि में पंचमाक्षर के बाद स्थान पर अनुस्वार का प्रयोग किया जाना चाहिए।

(गड्गा, ठण्डा, सन्ध्या, सम्पादक, नहीं। यदि पंचमाक्षर के बाद किसी अन्य वर्ग का कोई वर्ण आए अथवा वहीं पंचमाक्षर दुबारा आए तो पंचमाक्षर अनुस्वार के रूप में परिवर्तित नहीं होगा। जैसे – वाड्:मय, अन्न, सम्मेलन, सम्मति, सम्मान, चिन्मय, उन्मुख आदि। अत: वांमय, अंन, संमेलन, संमति, संमान, चिंमय आदि रूप ग्राह्य नहीं हैं। और स्पष्ट करने के लिए भिन्न रूप को देखें।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा 1

एक से चार वर्ण के साथ अनुस्वार (.) का प्रयोग होगा और पाँचवे वर्ण के अनुस्वार आनेपर आधे ड., म, ण, न, म का प्रयोग ( हलंत) होगा।

(ख) चंद्रबिंदु (*) के बिना प्राय: अर्थ से में संदेह की गुंजाइश रहती है। जैसे – हंस-हँस, अंगना-अंगना आदि में। इसलिए, ऐसे संदेह को दूर करने के लिए चंद्रबिंदु (*) का प्रयोग अवश्य किया जाना चाहिए।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण शब्द संपदा

लेकिन जहाँ (विशेषकर शिरोरेखा के ऊपर जुड़ने वाली मात्रा के साथ) चंद्रबिंदु (*) के प्रयोग से छपाई आदि में बहुत कठिनाई हो और चंद्रबिंदु के स्थान पर बिंदु (अनुस्वार चिह्न) का प्रयोग किसी प्रकार का संदेह उत्पन्न न करे, वहाँ उसका प्रयोग यथा स्थान अवश्य करना चाहिए।

इसी प्रकार छोटे बच्चों की प्रवेशिकाओं में जहाँ चंद्रबिंदु का उच्चारण दिखाना अभीष्ट हो, वहाँ उसका यथा स्थान प्रयोग किया जाना चाहिए। जैसे – कहाँ, हँसना, अँगना, वहाँ, यहाँ, सँवरना, आदि।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण मुहावरे

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Hindi Yuvakbharati 11th Digest व्याकरण मुहावरे Notes, Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Hindi व्याकरण मुहावरे

भाषा को स्पष्ट और प्रभावशाली बनाने के लिए मुहावरों का प्रयोग किया जाता है। मुहावरा ऐसा वाक्यांश होता है जो सामान्य अर्थ से भिन्न किसी विशेष अर्थ का बोध कराता है। उसके अंत में प्राय: किसी क्रिया का सामान्य रूप लगा होता है। इनके प्रयोग से भाषा में सरसता, सुंदरता और स्वाभाविकता आती है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण मुहावर

मुहावरों की विशेषताएँ :

  1. मुहावरे लोक जीवन की धरोहर हैं।
  2. इनके अंत में प्राय: ‘ना’ होता है।
  3. मुहावरे पूर्ण वाक्य नहीं होते।
  4. मुहावरों के अर्थ प्रकट करने के लिए क्रियापद का विशेष महत्त्व होता है।
  5. मुहावरे भाषा में कलात्मक अभिव्यक्ति की एक शैली है।
  6. अन्य भाषा में मुहावरों का शाब्दिक अनुवाद नहीं हो सकता।
  7. वाक्य में प्रयुक्त होने पर मुहावरों के शब्दों में रूपांतर हो जाता है। क्रिया लिंग, वचन, कारक आदि के अनुसार बदल जाती है। मुहावरे वाक्य में सरसता, विलक्षणता, तीखापन और प्रवाह उत्पन्न करते हैं। इससे हमारी अभिव्यक्ति में निखार आता है।

मुहावरों के प्रयोग में सावधानी :

  • मुहावरों का वाक्यों में प्रयोग करते समय इनके लाक्षणिक अर्थ की पूर्ण जानकारी होनी चाहिए अन्यथा अर्थ के अनर्थ होने की संभावना रहती है।
  • मुहावरे ज्यों के त्यों वाक्य में प्रयुक्त नहीं होते इसलिए प्रयोग के अनुसार उसके लिंग, वचन, कारक के अनुसार क्रिया में परिवर्तन करना चाहिए।

पाठ में प्रयुक्त मुहावरे तथा उनके वाक्य प्रयोग :

अंकुर जमाना : प्रारंभ करना
वाक्य : भाई के मन में कपट का अंकुर ऐसा जम गया था कि अब वह वृक्ष बन गया था।

अपने पैरों पर खड़ा होना : आत्मनिर्भर होना।
वाक्य : पढ़-लिखकर सीया अपने पैरों पर खड़ा होना चाहती है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण मुहावर

आँच न आने देना : संकट न आने देना।
वाक्य : गरीबी में भी माता-पिता ने अपने बच्चों पर आँच न आने दी

आँखों में सैलाब उमड़ना : फूट-फूटकर रोना।
वाक्य : पति की मृत्यु पर पत्नी की आँखों में सैलाब उमड़ आया था।

आँखें फटी रहना : आश्चर्यचकित रह जाना।
वाक्य : बालक कृष्ण के मुख में ब्रह्मांड को देखकर यशोदा मैया की आँखें फटी रह गईं।

आईने में मुँह देखना : अपनी योग्यता जाँचना।
वाक्य : आईने में मुँह देखकर काम करना चाहिए ताकि सफलता का फल प्राप्त हो।

आसमान के तारे तोड़ना : असंभव कार्य करना।
वाक्य : यह प्रतियोगिता जीतकर भार्गव ने आसमान के तारे तोड लाए हैं।

ईंट का जवाब पत्थर से देना : कड़ा जवाब देना।
वाक्य : हमारी टीम ने खेल जीतने के लिए ईंट का जवाब पत्थर से दिया

उधेड़ वुन में लगना : सोच-विचार करना।
वाक्य : पैसों की उधेड-बून में लगे लोग जीवन का मजा नहीं उठा पाते।

एक आँख से देखना : सामान्य रूप से देखना, पक्षपात न करना।
वाक्य : माँ अपने सभी बच्चों को एक आँख से देखती है

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण मुहावर

एक और एक ग्यारह होना : एकता में बल होना।
वाक्य : जब दोनों भाई एक और एक ग्यारह हो गए तो उनका बुरा चाहने वाले उनका कुछ नहीं बिगाड़ सके।

कदम बढ़ाना : प्रगति करना।
वाक्य : समस्या को पीछे छोड़कर कदम बढाना जीवन का सही मार्ग है।

कमर कसना : पूरी तरह तैयार होना।
वाक्य : बरसाती समस्याओं से निपटने के लिए हमने बरसात आने से पहले ही कमर कस ली है।

कमर सीधी करना : आराम करना, सुस्ताना।
वाक्य : इतना पसीना बहाने के बाद कमर सीधी करने का मौका मिला तो नई समस्या खड़ी हो गई।

कलई खुलना : भेद प्रकट होना, राज या रहस्य खुलना।
वाक्य : कोई कितना भी धूर्त क्यों न हो एक न एक दिन उसकी कलई खुल जाती है।

कान देना : ध्यान से सुनना।
वाक्य : अध्यापक की बात पर विद्यार्थी कान देंगे तो सफलता अवश्य मिलेगी।

किस्मत खुलना : भाग्य चमकना।
वावय : आज तो मेरी किस्मत खुल गई जो आपके दर्शन हुए।

गले का हार होना : अत्यंत प्रिय होना।
वाक्य : छोटा शेख घर में सभी के गले का हार था।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण मुहावर

गागर में सागर भरना : थोड़े में बहुत कहना।
वाक्य : बिहारी जी ने अपने दोहों में गागर में सागर भर दिया है इस बात को सभी हिंदी प्रेमियों ने स्वीकारा है।

घी के दीये जलाना : खुशी मनाना।
वाक्य : जब श्रीराम जी 14 वर्ष के वनवास के बाद अयोध्या लौटे तो अयोध्या वासियों ने घी के दीये जलाए

चिकना घड़ा होना : निर्लज्ज होना, किसी बात का असर न होना।
वाक्य : रमेश को समझाना बेकार है क्योंकि वह तो चिकना घड़ा है।

चुटकी लेना : व्यंग्य करना।
वाक्य : चुटकी लेने की आदत कभी-कभी भारी पड़ जाती है।

जबान देना : वचन देना।
वाक्य : रमेश ने अगर जबान दी है तो वह जरूर निभाएगा।

झंडे गाड़ना : पूर्ण रूप से प्रभाव जमाना।
वाक्य : छोटी उम्र में ही शिवाजी महाराज ने 12 मावलों के साथ मुगलो के आधे किले पर झंडे गाड़ दिए थे।

डंका पीटना : प्रचार करना।
वाक्य : अपनी छोटी सी सफलता का भी डंका पीटने में सीया पीछे नहीं हटती।

तितर-बितर होना : बिखर जाना।
वाक्य : माँ की मृत्यु के बाद परिवार तितर-बितर हो गया।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण मुहावर

हजारों दीप जल उठना : आनंदित हो उठना।
वाक्य : विदेश जाने के लिए वीजा मिल गया तो रमेश के मन में हजारों दीप जल उठे

रुपये दाँत से पकड़ना : कंजूसी करना।
वाक्य : इस महँगाई के दौर में हर कोई रुपये दाँत से पकडकर जी रहा है।

दूध का दूध, पानी का पानी करना : इंसाफ करना, न्याय करना।
वाक्य : रंगे हाथ पकड़े जाने पर सच्चाई सबके सामने आ गई और दूध का दूध और पानी का पानी हो गया।

नाम कमाना : यश प्राप्त करना।
वाक्य : कड़ी मेहनत करके राज ने नाम कमाया इसलिए सब उसकी इज्जत करते हैं।

पाँचों उँगलियाँ घी में होना : हर तरफ से लाभ होना।
वाक्य : अब बेटा भी बराबरी से काम करने लगा तो लाला जी की पाँचो उँगलियाँ घी में है।

फला न समाना : अत्यधिक प्रसन्न होना।
वाक्य : मनोकामना पूरी होने पर सीया फूली न समाई

वीडा उठाना : किसी काम को करने की ठान लेना।
वाक्य : देश के नागरिकों को पर्यावरण सुरक्षा का बीड़ा उठाना होगा।

वाँछे खिलना : अत्यधिक प्रसन्न होना।
वाक्य : चुनाव जीतने के बाद नेता की बाँछे खिल उठीं।

मरजीवा होना : कठोर साधना से लक्ष्य तक पहुँचने वाला होना।
वाक्य : अलवर में सात नदियों को जीवित कर श्री राजेंद्र सिंह जी मरजीवा हो गए

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण मुहावर

मल्हार गाना : आनंद मनाना।
वाक्य : समय पर बारिश होने से किसान मल्हार गाने लगे

राई का पहाड़ बनाना : बात को बढ़ा-चढ़ाकर कहना।
ताक्य : रमेश ने बात को इस ढंग से बताया कि राई का पहाड बन गया।

लोहा मानना : श्रेष्ठता स्वीकार करना।
वाक्य : औरंगजेब भी शिवाजी के युद्ध कौशल का लोहा मानता था।

सफेद झूठ बोलना : पूरी तरह से झूठ बोलना।
वाक्य : दुष्ट प्रवृत्ति के लोग सफेद झूठ बोलने से बाज नहीं आते।

सिर खपाना : ऐसे काम में समय लगाना जिसमें कोई लाभ नहीं।
वाक्य : सुबह से शाम तक सिर खपाते रहे लेकिन पिताजी ने दी पहेली हल नहीं कर पाए।

सिर पर सेहरा बाँधना : अधिक यश प्राप्त करना।
वाक्य : काव्य गायन प्रतियोगिता में रमेश केवल सफल ही नहीं हुआ बल्कि उसके सिर पर सेहरा बँधा।

सोना उगलना : बहुत अधिक लाभ होना।
वाक्य : मेरे देश की मिट्टी ऐसी उपजाऊ है कि सोना उगलती है।

सौ वात की एक वात : असली बात, निचोड़।
वाक्य : सौ बात की एक बात कहूँ, मुझे बेटा-बेटी में भेदभाव बिलकुल पसंद नहीं।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण मुहावर

हाथ-पैर मारना : बहुत प्रयत्न करना।
वाक्य : इधर-उधर हाथ-पैर मारने के बाद मेरा लोन सेंक्शन हुआ।

हौसले बुलंद होना : उत्साह बने रहना।
वाक्य : शरीर कमजोर हो गया है लेकिन अभी भी राय साहब के हौसले बुलंद हैं

श्रीगणेश करना : कार्य आरंभ करना।
वाक्य : दो पैसे जमा होते ही रमेश ने अपने व्यवसाय का श्रीगणेश किया

दाँतों तले उँगली दबाना : आश्चर्यचकित होना।
वाक्य : रणभूमि में अभिमन्यु की वीरता देखकर कौरवों ने दाँतों तले उँगली दबाई

अंधे की लाठी होना : निराधार का सहारा बनाना।
वाक्य : मदर टेरेसा भारत आकर अंधे की लाठी बनकर अपना कार्य करने लगी।

आग से खेलना : मुसीबत मोल लेना।
वाक्य : आज़ादी की लड़ाई लड़ते समय आग से खेलकर कई देशवासियों ने अपना घर-परिवार दाँव पर लगा दिया था।

मुट्ठी गर्म करना : रिश्वत देना।
वाक्य : भ्रष्टाचार की जड़ें इतनी गहराई तक पहुँच गई हैं कि जब तक मुट्ठी गर्म न करो कोई काम ही नहीं करता।

इतिश्री होना : समाप्त होना।
वाक्य : 15 अगस्त 1947 को देश आज़ाद हुआ और अंग्रेज शासन की इतिश्री हुई

उड़ती चिड़िया पहचानना : तीक्ष्ण बुद्धि वाला होना।
वाक्य : बीरबल उडती चिडिया पहचान लेते थे और हर समस्या को सुलझाने में अकबर की सहायता करते है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण मुहावर

हथेली पर सरसों जमाना : कठिन कार्य करना।
वाक्य : दुश्मनों की छावनी में जाकर उनके भेद जानना मतलब हथेली पर सरसों जमाना है।

कंचन बरसना : धन-दौलत से परिपूर्ण होना।
वाक्य : कभी हमारे देश में कंचन बरसता था परंतु विदेशी आक्रमण ने इसे खोखला कर दिया।

कानों कान खबर न होना : बिल्कुल पता न चलना।
वाक्य : सेठ जी ने बेटी का विवाह कर दिया लेकिन किसी को कानों कान खबर न हुई

गाल बजाना : अपनी प्रशंसा आप करना।
वाक्य : मोहन अपनी सफलता पर खूब गाल बजाता था परंतु परिणाम सामने आने पर शर्मिंदा हुआ।

घड़ों पानी पड़ना : बहुत लज्जित होना।
वाक्य : बेटे की करतूतों का भेद खुलते ही पिता पर घडों पानी पड़ गया।

चिकनी-चुपड़ी बातें करना : चापलूसी करना, मीठी-मीठी बातें बोलना।
वाक्य : अब चिकनी-चुपड़ी बातें करने से कोई लाभ नहीं, सच्चाई सब जान गए हैं।

छाती पर साँप लोटना : ईर्ष्या होना।
वाक्य : गीता के कक्षा में प्रथम आने की खबर सुनते ही मीता की छाती पर साँप लोटने लगा।

तूती बोलना : प्रभाव होना।
वाक्य : मंत्री महोदय के खास आदमी होने की वजह से उसकी तूती बोलती है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Hindi व्याकरण मुहावर

दो टुक जवाब देना : स्पष्ट बोलना।
वाक्य : मैंने आपसे दो टुक बात कर ली है, आगे आपकी मर्जी।

नुक्ताचीनी करना : आलोचना करना।
वाक्य : हर बात में नुक्ताचीनी करने की आदत के चलते रमेश के दोस्त कम और दुश्मन ही अधिक है।

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 1.
How is the structural formula of a molecule represented? Give an example.
Answer:
Structural formula:
i. Structural formula of a molecule shows all the constituent atoms denoted with their respective chemical symbols and all the covalent bonds therein represented by a dash joining mutually bonded atoms.
ii. Structural formula of methane is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 1

Question 2.
Write a note on Lewis structures with the help of an example.
Answer:
Lewis structures:
i. The electron dot structures are called as Lewis structures,
e. g. The Lewis structure of methane is shown below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 2
ii. All the valence electrons of carbon and hydrogen are shown as dots around them. Two dots drawn between two atoms indicate one covalent bond between them. The covalent bond can be represented by a dash joining mutually bonded atoms.
iii. The dash formula represents simplified Lewis formula of the molecule.
e.g. Dash formula of methane:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 3

Question 3.
How is the condensed formula of an organic molecule written?
Answer:
The complete structural formula is further simplified by hiding some or all the covalent bonds and indicating the number of identical groups attached to an atom by a subscript. The resulting formula of a compound is known as condensed formula.
e.g.

  1. The condensed formula of ethane is written as CH3-CH3 or CH3CH3.
  2. The condensed formula of n-pentane is written as CH3CH2CH2CH2CH3 or CH3(CH2)3CH3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 4.
What do you understand by the term bond-line formula?
Answer:
Bond-line or zig-zag formula:
i. The condensed formula is simplified into bond-line formula, which is also known as zig-zag formula.
ii. In this representation of an organic molecule, the symbols of carbon and hydrogen atoms are not written. The carbon-carbon bonds are represented by lines drawn in a zig-zag manner
iii. The terminals of the zig-zag line indicate methyl groups and the intersection of lines denote a carbon atom bonded to appropriate number of hydrogen atoms which satisfy the tetravalency of the carbon atom.
e.g. Propane is represented by bond-line or zig-zag formula:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 4
iv. If a compound contains heteroatom(s) or H-atom(s) bonded to heteroatom(s), then they are represented by their symbols.
e.g. Ethanol is represented by bond-line or zig-zag formula:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 5

Question 5.
Name the different methods used to represent three-dimensional structure of a molecule on the paper.
Answer:
Four different methods are used to represent three-dimensional structure of a molecule on the paper:

  1. Wedge formula
  2. Fischer projection formula or cross formula
  3. Newman projection formula
  4. Sawhorse or andiron or perspective formula

Question 6.
Write a short note on: Wedge formula.
Answer:
Wedge formula:
i. The three-dimensional (3-D) structure of organic molecules can be represented on plane paper by using solidMaharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 6 and dashed Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 7 wedges and normal line (-) for single bonds.
ii. In this formula, the solid wedge is used to indicate a bond projecting up from the plane of paper, towards the reader (observer), whereas the dashed wedge is used to depict a bond going backward, below the paper away from the reader.
iii. The bonds lying in plane of the paper are depicted by using a normal line (-).
iv. Wedge formula of methane molecule is shown below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 8

Question 7.
How is Fischer projection formula of a molecule drawn? Explian by giving an example.
Answer:
Fischer projection (cross) formula:

  • In this representation, a three dimensional molecule is projected on plane of paper.
  • Fischer projection formula can be drawn by visualizing the molecule with its main carbon chain vertical.
  • Each carbon on the vertical chain is represented by a cross. By convention, the horizontal lines of the cross represent bonds projecting up from the carbon and the vertical lines represent the bonds going below the carbon.

Fischer projection formula of a molecule along with its wedge formula is represented below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 9
[Note: Fischer projection formula is more commonly used in carbohydrate chemistry.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 8.
Write the Fischer projection and wedge formula for 2-chloro-propan-2-ol.
Answer:
2-Chloropropan-2-ol has formula CH3C(Cl)(OH)CH3.
Fischer projection and wedge formula for 2-chloropropan-2-ol can be given as:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 10

Question 9.
Convert the following wedge formula to Fischer projection formula:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 11
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 12

Question 10.
Explain how will you represent the Newman projection formula and Sawhorse formula of ethane molecule?
Answer:
i. Newman projection formula of ethane molecule:
a. A Newman projection views the carbon-carbon single bond directly head-on. The front carbon atom is represented by a point while the rear carbon atom is represented by a circle. The point is drawn at the centre of the circle.
b. Bonds attached to the front carbon atom are represented by three lines drawn at an angle of 120° to each other from the centre of the circle and bonds attached to the rear carbon atom are represented by three lines drawn at an angle of 120° to each other from the circumference of the circle.
c. Newman projections of ethane molecule is represented in adjacent diagram.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 13

ii. Sawhorse (or andiron or perspective) formula of ethane molecule:
a. In this representation, a C-C single bond is represented by a long slanting line. The lower end of the line represents the front carbon and the upper end represents the rear carbon.
b. The remaining three bonds at the two carbons are shown to radiate from the respective carbons. (As the central C-C bond is drawn rather elongated the bonds radiating from the front and rear carbons do not intermingle.)
c. Sawhorse formula of ethane molecule is represented in adjacent diagram.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 14

Question 11.
Explain the classification of organic compounds based on carbon skeleton.
Answer:
On the basis of their carbon skeleton, organic compounds are classified into two main groups:
i. Acyclic or aliphatic or open chain compounds:
a. Organic compounds in which carbon atoms are joined to form an open chain are called aliphatic compounds.
b. Their structure may consist of straight chains (in which carbon atoms are bonded to one or two other carbon atoms) or branched chains (in which at least one carbon atom is bonded to three or four other carbon atoms).
e.g.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 15

ii. Cyclic or closed chain or ring compounds:
a. Organic compounds in which carbon atoms are joined to form one or more closed rings with or without hetero atom are called cyclic compounds.
b. They are further divided into two types: Homocyclic and heterocyclic compounds.
1. Homocyclic or carbocyclic compounds: The cyclic organic compounds which have a ring made up of only carbon atoms are called as homocyclic or carbocyclic compounds.
They are further divided into:
i. Alicyclic compounds: These are cyclic compounds (ring of 3 or more C-atoms) exhibiting properties similar to those of aliphatic compounds.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 16
ii. Aromatic compounds: These compounds have special stability.
Aromatic compounds are further classified as benzenoid and non-benzenoid aromatics.
a. Benzenoid aromatics contain at least one benzene ring in the structure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 17
b. Non-benzenoid aromatics contain an aromatic ring, other than benzene.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 18

2. Heterocyclic compounds: Cyclic organic compounds which contain one or more heteroatoms (such as O, N, S, etc.) in the ring are called heterocyclic compounds.
They are further divided into:
i. Heterocyclic aromatic compounds: Aromatic compounds which contain at least one heteroatom in the ring are called heterocyclic aromatic (hetero-aromatic) compounds.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 19
ii. Heterocyclic non-aromatic compounds: Alicyclic compounds, which contain at least one heteroatom in the ring are called heterocyclic non-aromatic compounds (hetero-alicyclic) compounds.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 20

Question 12.
What is a functional group? Give two examples.
Answer:
Functional group:
i. A part of an organic molecule which undergoes change as a result of a reaction is called functional group.
OR
An atom or a group of atoms in the organic molecule which determines its characteristic chemical
properties is called functional group.
e.g. a. The functional group in alcohols is -OH group.
b. The functional group in aldehydes is -CHO group.

ii. There are a large variety of functional groups in organic compounds. Hence, organic compounds can be classified based on the nature of functional group present in them.
iii. The resulting individual class of compounds is called a family and is named after the constituent functional group.
e.g. Family of alcohols, which includes organic compounds having -OH functional group.

Note: Functional groups in organic compounds:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 21
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 22
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 23

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 13.
Indicate all the functional groups present in the following compounds.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 24
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 25

Question 14.
Identify the functional group in the following compounds:
i. n-Butyl alcohol
ii. Propanone
iii. Acetylene
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 26

Question 15.
Write the name of the family of the following organic compounds:
i. CH3(CH2)3CH2Cl
ii. CH3CH2CH2NH2
iii. CH3CH2COCH3
iv. CH3CH2OCH3
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 27

Question 16.
Write a note on homologous series.
Answer:
Homologous series:

  • A series of compounds of the same family in which each member has the same type of carbon skeleton and functional group, and differs from the next member by a constant difference of one methylene group (-CH2-) in its molecular and structural formula is called as homologous series.
  • The individual members of the series are called homologues and they can be represented by a same general formula.
  • Two successive homologues differ by one – CH2 (methylene) unit (i.e., molecular weight of each successive member differs by 14 units).
  • Homologues show similar chemical properties.
  • Physical properties (like melting point, boiling point, density, solubility, etc.) of the homologues show a gradual change with increase in the molecular weight of the member.

Note: Consider the homologous series of straight chain aldehydes. The boiling point increases down the series as molecular weight increases.

Name Molecular formula Boiling point
Formaldehyde HCHO -21 °C
Acetaldehyde CH3CHO 21 °C
Propionaldehyde C2H5CHO 48 °C
Butyraldehyde C3H7CHO 75 °C
Valeraldehyde C4H9CHO 103 °C

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 17.
Alkanes constitute a homologous series of straight chain saturated hydrocarbons. Write down the structural formulae of the first five homologues of this series. Write their molecular formulae and deduce the general formula of such homologous series.
Answer:
The first five homologues are generated by adding one – CH2 – at a time, starting with the first homologue, methane (CH4).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 28
By counting carbon and hydrogen atoms in the five homologues, we get their molecular formulae as CH4, C2H6, C3H8, C4H10 and C5H12.
Comparing these molecular formulae and assigning the number of carbon atoms as ‘n’, the following general formula is deduced: CnH2n+2.

Question 18.
Write down structural formulae of (i) the third higher and (ii) the second lower homologue of CH3CH2COOH.
Answer:
i. Structural formula of the third higher homologue is obtained by adding three – CH2 – units to the carbon chain of the given structure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 29
ii. Structural formula of the second lower homologue is obtained by removing two – CH2 – units from the carbon chain of the given structure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 30

Question 19.
Write the general formula of homologous series of alcohols.
Answer:
General formula of homologous series of alcohols can be represented as, CnH2n+1OH (where n = 1, 2, 3, …).

Question 20.
Write the name and molecular formulae of the first three higher homologues of propyl chloride.
Answer:
General formula: CnH2n+1Cl (where n = 1, 2, 3, …)

No. of carbon atoms Molecular formula Name
n = 3 C3H7Cl Propyl chloride
n = 4 C4H9Cl Butyl chloride
n = 5 C5H11Cl Pentyl chloride
n = 6 C6H13Cl Hexyl chloride

Question 21.
What is the molecular formula of:
i. first higher homologue of propionic acid?
ii. first lower homologue of propionic acid?
Answer:
i. First higher homologue of propionic acid:
(Addition of 1-CH3 group to CH3CH2COOH)
Butyric acid: C3H7COOH

ii. First lower homologue of propionic acid:
(1-CH3 group less from CH3CH3COOH)
Acetic acid: CH3COOH

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 22.
How are the saturated (sp3) carbon atoms in a molecule classified based on the number of other carbon atoms bonded to it? Give an example that has all the four types of carbon atoms.
Answer:
i. The saturated (sp3) carbons in a molecule are classified as primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary in accordance with the number of other carbons bonded to it by single bonds.

  • Primary carbon atom (1°): This carbon atom is bonded to only one other carbon atom. Terminal carbon atoms are always 1° carbon atoms.
  • Secondary carbon atom (2°): This carbon atom is bonded to two other carbon atoms.
  • Tertiary carbon atom (3°): This carbon atom is bonded to three other carbon atoms.
  • Quaternary carbon atom (4°): This carbon atom is bonded to four other carbon atoms.

ii. An example molecule having all the four types of carbon atoms:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 31
Thus, in 2,2,5-trimethylhexane, there are five primary, two secondary, one tertiary and one quaternary carbon atoms.
[Note: Hydrogen atoms attached to primary’, secondary and tertiary carbon atoms are referred to as primary, secondary and tertiary H-atoms respectively.]

Question 23.
Give common name/trivial name of the following compounds.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 32
Answer:
i. Lactic acid
ii. Glycine
iii. Glycerol
iv. Chloroform

Question 24.
Give a basic idea about IUPAC nomenclature system and comment on IUPAC names of straight chain alkanes.
Answer:
i. International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC) was founded (in 1919) and a systematic method of nomenclature for organic compounds was developed under its banner.
ii. This was done because of growing number of organic compounds with increasingly complicated structures and it was difficult to name them. To simplify and avoid confusions, IUPAC system is accepted and widely used all over the world today. According to this system, a unique name is given to each organic compound.

Following things are taken into consideration while naming a particular organic compound:

  • To arrive at the IUPAC name of an organic compound, its structure is considered to be made of three main parts: parent hydrocarbon, branches and functional groups.
  • The IUPAC names of a compound are obtained by modifying the name of its parent hydrocarbon further incorporating names of the branches and functional groups as prefix and suffix.

IUPAC names of straight chain alkanes:
a. The homologous series of straight chain alkanes forms the parent hydrocarbon part of the IUPAC names of aliphatic compounds.
b. The IUPAC name of a straight chain alkane is derived from the number of carbon atoms it contains.
c. IUPAC names of the first twenty alkanes are mentioned in the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 33

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 25.
Match the following:

Column – I Column – II
i. C19H40 a. Undecane
ii. C12H26 b. Nonadecane
iii. C11H24 c. Dodecane
d. Nonane

Answer:
i – b,
ii – c,
iii – a

Question 26.
Explain the following with two examples:
i. straight chain alkyl groups
ii. branched chain alkyl group
Answer:
i. Straight chain alkyl group: It is obtained by removing one H-atom from the terminal carbon of an alkane molecule.
ii. It is named by replacing ‘ane’ of the alkane by ‘yl’.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 34
iii. Branched chain alkyl group: It is obtained by removing a H-atom from any one of the non-terminal carbons of an alkane or any H-atom from a branched alkane.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 35

Note: Straight chain alkyl groups
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 36
Trivial names of small branched alkyl groups
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 37

Question 27.
Write names of following groups.
i. C6H5
ii. (CH3)3C-
Answer:
i. Phenyl group
ii. tert-Butyl group

Question 28.
State the rules to assign IUPAC nomenclature of a branched chain alkane.
Answer:
i. Select the longest continuous chain of carbon atoms to be called the parent chain. All other carbon atoms not included in this chain constitute, side chains or branches or alkyl substituents. For example:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 38
Parent chain has five carbon atoms and -CH3 group is alkyl substituent.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 39
Parent chain has six carbon atoms and methyl group is the alkyl substituent.
If two chains of equal length are located, then the one with maximum number of substituents is selected as the parent chain.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 40
Parent chain hexane with one alkyl substituent is the incorrect chain.

ii. The parent chain is numbered from one end to the other to locate the position, called locant number of the alkyl substituent. The numbering is done in that direction which will result in lowest possible locant numbers.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 41
iii. Names of the alkyl substituents are added as prefix to the name of the parent alkane. Different alkyl substituents are listed in alphabetical order with each substituent name preceded by the appropriate locant number. The name of the substituent is separated from the locant number by a hyphen.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 42
The name is 4-ethyl-3-methylheptane and not 3-methyl-4-ethylheptane.
iv. When both the numberings give the same set of locants, that numbering is chosen which gives smaller locant to the substituent having alphabetical priority.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 43
The name is 3-ethyl-4-methylhexane and not 3-methyl-4-ethylhexane.

v. If two or more identical substituents are present the prefix di (for 2), tri (for 3), tetra (for 4) and so on, are used before the name of the substituent to indicate how many identical substituents are there. The locants of identical substituents are listed together, separated by commas.

There must be as many numbers in the name as the substituents. A digit and an alphabet are separated by hyphen. The prefixes di, tri, tetra, sec and tert are ignored in alphabetizing the substituent names. Substituent and parent hydrocarbon names are joined into one word.

vi. Branched alkyl group having no accepted trivial name is named with the longest continuous chain beginning at the point of attachment as the base name. Carbon atom of this group attached to parent chain is numbered as ‘1’. The name of such substituent is enclosed in bracket.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 44

Question 29.
Complete the following table.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 45
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 46
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 47

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 30.
Explain the rules for IUPAC nomenclature of unsaturated hydrocarbons (Alkenes and Alkynes).
Answer:
While writing IUPAC names of alkenes and alkynes following rules are to be followed in addition to rules for alkanes.
i. The longest continuous chain must include carbon-carbon multiple bond. Thus, the longest continuous chains in 1 and II contain four and six carbons, respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 48
ii. Numbering of this chain must be done such that carbon-carbon multiple bond has the lowest possible locant number.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 49
iii. The ending ‘ane’ of alkane is replaced by ‘ene’ for an alkene and ‘yne’ for an alkyne.
iv. Position of carbon atom from which multiple bond starts is indicated by smaller locant number of two multiple bonded carbons before the ending ‘ene’ or ‘yne’. e.g.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 50
v. If the multiple bond is equidistant from both the ends of a selected chain, then carbon atoms are numbered from that end, which is nearer to first branching.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 51
vi. If the parent chain contains two double bonds or two triple bonds, then it is named as diene or diyne. In all these cases ‘a’ of ‘ane’ (alkane) is retained.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 52
vii. If the parent chain contains both double and triple bond, then carbon atoms are numbered from that end where multiple bond is nearer. Such systems are named by putting ‘en’ ending first followed by ‘yne’. The number indicating the location of multiple bond is placed before the name.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 53
viii. If there is a tie between a double bond and a triple bond, the double bond gets the lower number.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 54

Question 31.
Give IUPAC rules for naming simple monocyclic hydrocarbons.
Answer:
i. A saturated monocyclic hydrocarbon is named by attaching prefix ‘cyclo’ to the name of the corresponding open chain alkane.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 55
ii. An unsaturated monocyclic hydrocarbon is named by substituting ‘ene’, ‘yne’, etc. for ‘ane’ in the name of corresponding cycloalkane.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 56
iii. If side chains are present then the numbering of the ring carbon is started from a side chain.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 57
iv. If alkyl groups contain greater number of carbon atoms than the ring, the compound is named as derivative of alkane. Ring is treated as substituent.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 58

Question 32.
Give the IUPAC names of the following compounds:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 59
Answer:
i. 1-Ethyl-1-methyl-2-propylcyclohexane
ii. 1,2-Dimethylcyclobutane
iii. Cyclopentene
iv. 3-Cyclopropylhex-1-yne

Question 33.
Explain in short how naming of monofunctional compound is done.
Answer:
Naming of monofunctional compounds: When a molecule contains only one functional group, the longest carbon chain containing that functional group is identified as the parent chain and numbered so as to give the smallest locant number to the carbon bearing the functional group. The parent name is modified by applying appropriate suffix. Location of the functional group is indicated where necessary and when it is NOT numbered ‘1’.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 60
When the functional group cannot be used as suffix, and can be only the prefix, the molecule is named as parent alkane carrying the functional group as substituent at specified carbon.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 61

Question 34.
Complete the following.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 62
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 63

Question 35.
Give examples of functional groups which can appear only as prefix?
Answer:
Functional groups which can appear only as prefix are as follows:
i. Nitro group (-NO2)
ii. Halides (-X): Represented by prefix “halo” (like fluoro, chloro, bromo, iodo).
iii. Alkoxy group (-OR): Groups like methoxy (-OCH3), ethoxy (-OC2H5), etc.

Note: Functional groups appearing as prefix and suffix

Functional Group Prefix Suffix
-COOH Carboxy – oic acid
-COOR alkoxycarbonyl – oate
-COCl Chlorocarbonyl – oyl chloride
-CONH2 Carbamoyl – amide
-CN Cyano – nitrile
-CHO Formyl – al
-CO- Oxo – one
-OH Hydroxy – ol
-NH2 Amino – amine

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 36.
Write a note on principal functional group.
Answer:
i. The organic compounds possessing two or more functional groups (same or different) in their molecules are called polyfunctional compounds.
ii. When there are two or more different functional groups, one of them is selected as the principal functional group and the others are considered as substituents.
iii. The principal functional group is used as suffix of the IUPAC name while the other substituents are written with appropriate prefixes. The principal functional group is decided on the basis of the following order of priority:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 64

Question 37.
Explain the rules for naming mono or polyfunctional compounds.
Answer:

  • Identification of parent chain: The longest carbon chain containing the single or the principal functional group is identified as parent chain.
    e.g. Ethers are named as alkoxyalkane. While naming it, the larger alkyl group is chosen as parent chain.
  • Numbering of parent chain: It is done so as to give the lowest possible locant numbers to the carbon atom of this functional group.
  • Suffix: The name of the parent hydrocarbon is modified adequately with appropriate suffix in accordance with the single/principal functional group.
  • Names of the other functional groups (if any) are attached to this modified name as prefixes. The locant numbers of all the functional groups are indicated before the corresponding suffix/prefix.

[Note: The carbon atom in -COOR, -COCl, -CONH2, -CN and -CHO is C – 1 by rule and therefore, is not mentioned in the IUPAC name.]

Question 38.
Write IUPAC names for the following structures:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 65
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 66
Here, the principal functional group, ketone is located at the C-3 on the five carbon chain. The -OH group, the hydroxyl substituent is at C-2. Therefore, the IUPAC name is 2-hydroxypentan-3-one.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 67
Here, the principal functional group is carboxylic acid. The amino substituent is located at C-3 on four carbon chain. Therefore, the IUPAC name 3-aminobutanoic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 68
Here, two same functional groups are present at C-1 and C-2 position. They are indicated by using the term ‘di’ before the class suffix. Therefore, the IUPAC name is propane-1,2-diol.
iv. CH2 = CH – CH = CH2
Here, the parent chain contains two double bonds at C-1 and C-3, hence it is named as diene. Therefore, the IUPAC name is buta-1,3-diene.

Question 39.
Give IUPAC rules for naming substituted benzene.
Answer:
i. Monosubstituted benzene : The IUPAC name of a monosubstituted benzene is obtained by placing the name of substituent as prefix to the parent skeleton which is benzene.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 69

ii. Some monosubstituted benzenes have trivial names which may show no resemblance with the name of the attached substituent group. For example, methylbenzene is known as toluene, aminobenzene as aniline, hydroxybenzene as phenol and so on. The common names written in the bracket are also used universally and accepted by IUPAC.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 70

iii. If the alkyl substituent is larger than benzene ring (7 or more carbon atoms) the compound is named as phenyl-substituted alkane.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 71

iv. Benzene ring can as well be considered as substituent when it is attached to an alkane with a functional group.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 72

v. Disubstituted benzene derivatives:
Common names of the three possible isomers of disubstitued benzene derivatives are given using one of the prefixes ortho (o-), meta (m-) or para (p-).
IUPAC system, however, uses numbering instead of prefixes, o-, m-, or p-.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 73

vi. If two substituents are different, then they enter in alphabetical order.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 74

vii. If one of the two groups gives special name to the molecule then the compound is named as derivative of the special compound.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 75

viii. Trisubstituted benzene derivatives : If more than two substituents are attached to benzene ring, numbers are used to indicate their relative positions following the alphabetical order and lowest locant rule. In some cases, common name of benzene derivatives is taken as parent compound.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 76

Question 40.
Write the structural formula of following derivatives of benzene.
i. 2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene
ii. 1-Chloro-2,4-dinitrobenzene
iii. 4-Broniobenzaldehyde
iv. 1-Iodo-3-phenylpentane
v. 2-Hydroxybenzaldehyde
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 77

Question 41.
Write the IUPAC names of the following compounds.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 78
Answer:
i. 5-Phenylpent-1-ene
ii. 2-Hydroxybenzoic acid

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 42.
Define the terms:
i. Isomerism
ii. Isomers
Answer:
i. Isomerism: The phenomenon of existence of two or more compounds possessing the same molecular formula is known as isomerism.

ii. Isomers: Two or more compounds having the same molecular formula are called as isomers of each other. [Note: The isomers are different compounds having same molecular formula and therefore they exhibit different physical and chemical properties.]

Question 43.
Define: Structural isomerism
Answer:
Structural isomerism: When two or more compounds have same molecular formula but different structural formulae, they are said to be structural isomers of each other and the phenomenon is known as structural isomerism.

Question 44.
Define: Stereoisomerism
Answer:
When different compounds have the same structural formula but different relative arrangement of groups/atoms in space, that is, different spatial arrangement of groups/atoms, it is called as stereoisomerism.

Question 45.
Give different types of structural isomerism that organic compounds can exhibit.
Answer:
Different types of structural isomerism that organic compounds may exhibit are as follows:

  • Chain isomerism
  • Position isomerism
  • Functional group isomerism
  • Metamerism
  • Tautomerism

Question 46.
Explain chain isomerism in alkanes with two suitable examples.
Answer:
Chain isomerism: When two or more compounds have the same molecular formula but different parent chain or different carbon skeletons, it is referred to as chain isomerism and such isomers are known as chain isomers.
e.g.
i. Butane (C4H10) exists in two isomeric forms:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 79
Here, n-butane contains longest chain of four carbon atoms whereas isobutane contains longest chain of three carbon atoms. Such isomers having different carbon skeletons are called as chain isomers.
[Note: Methylpropane has no other branched isomers, hence locant (2) can be dropped.]

ii. Pentene (C5H12) exists in three isomeric forms:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 80
[Note: The numbers of chain isomers increase with the increase in the number of carbon atoms in the molecule.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 47.
Write a note on position isomerism.
Answer:
i. The phenomenon in which diffèrent compounds having the same functional group at different positions on the parent chain is known as position isomerism.
ii. e.g. But-1-ene and but-2-ene are position isomers of each other as they have the same molecular formula (C4H8) and the sanie carbon skeleton hut the double bonds are located at different positions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 81

Question 48.
Define: Functional group isomerism
Answer:
Different compounds having the same molecular formula but different functional groups are called as futictional group isomers and the phenomenon is called as junctional group isomerism.
e.g. CH3 – O – CH3 (Dimethyl ether) and C2H5 – OH (ethyl alcohol) have same molecular formula (C2H6O) but former has ether (-O-) functional group and the latter has alcoholic (-OH) functional group.

Question 49.
Explain: Metamerism
Answer:
i. Metamerism may be defined as a type of isomerism in which different compounds have same molecular formula and the same functional group but have unequal distribution of carbon atoms on either side of the functional group. Such isomers are known as metamers.

ii. e.g. Ether with molecular formula C4H10O has three metamers. They have same functional group as ether but have different distribution of carbon atoms attached to etheral oxygen. These metamers are:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 82

Question 50.
Explain: Tautomerism
Answer:
When same compound exists as mixture of two or more structurally distinct molecules which are in rapid equilibrium with each other, then the phenomenon is referred to as tautomerism. Such interconverting isomers are called tautomers.
i. In nearly all the cases, it is the proton which shifts from one atom to another atom in the molecule to form its tautomer.
ii. Keto-enol tautomerism is very common form of tautomerism.
iii. Here, a hydrogen atom shifts reversibly from the a-carbon of the keto form to oxygen atom of the enol. This type of isomerism is known as keto-enol tautomerism.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 83

Question 51.
Explain the terms substrate, reagent and byproduct in an organic reaction.
Answer:

  • Organic molecules primarily contain various types of covalent bonds between the constituent atoms. During an organic reaction, molecules of the reactant undergo change in their structure. A covalent bond at a carbon atom in the reactant is broken and a new covalent bond is formed at it, giving rise to the product.
  • The reactant that provides carbon to the new bond is called substrate. In other words, substrate is a chemical species which reacts with reagent to give corresponding products.
  • The other reactant which brings about this change is called reagent.
  • Apart from the product of interest, some other products are also formed in an organic reaction. These are called byproducts.

e.g. In following reaction, methane is the substrate and chlorine is the reagent. The product of interest is methyl chloride and the byproduct is HCl.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 84

Question 52.
Explain: Organic reactions are often a multi-step process.
Answer:

  • Organic molecules contain covalent bonds, which are made of valence electrons of the constituent atoms.
  • During an organic reaction, molecules of the reactant undergo change in their structure due to redistribution of valence electrons of constituent atoms.
  • This results in the bond breaking or bond forming processes as organic reaction proceeds. However, these processes are usually not instantaneous.
  • As a result of this, the overall organic reaction occurs by the formation of one or more unstable species called intermediates.

Thus, organic reactions are often a multi-step process.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 53.
What do you mean by reaction mechanism? Give importance of reaction mechanism.
Answer:
i. Mechanism of an organic reaction is the complete step by step description of exactly which bonds break and which bonds form, in what manner and in what order to give the observed products.

ii. In general, reaction mechanism is a sequential account of:

  • the electron movement taking place during each step
  • the bond cleavage and/or bond formation
  • accompanying changes in energy and shapes of various species and
  • rate of the overall reaction.

The individual steps, constitute the reaction mechanism.

iii. Importance of reaction mechanism:
The knowledge of mechanism of a reaction is useful for understanding the reactivity of the concerned organic compounds and, in turn, helpful for planning synthetic strategies.

Question 54.
What are the different ways in which a covalent bond fission can takes place?
Answer:
The covalent bond fission/cleavage takes place in two ways:

  1. Homolytic fission
  2. Heterolytic fission

Question 55.
Explain homolytic cleavage of a bond with suitable example.
Answer:
Homolytic cleavage:
i. A covalent bond consists of two electrons (i.e., a bond pair of electrons) shared between the two bonded atoms.
ii. In homolytic cleavage of a covalent bond, one of the two electrons go to one of the bonded atoms and the other is bound to the other atom.
iii. This type of cleavage gives rise to two neutral species carrying one unpaired electron each. Such a species with single unpaired electron is called as free radical.
iv. The free radicals are short lived (transitory) and unstable. Therefore, they are very reactive, having tendency to seek an electron for pairing.
v. Homolytic cleavage can be represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 85
where movement of a single electron is represented by a half-headed curved arrow or fish hook,
vi. Thus, the symmetrical breaking of a covalent bond between two atoms such that each atom retains one electron of the shared pair forming free radicals is known as homolytic cleavage (homolysis).

Question 56.
What conditions favour homolytic cleavage?
Answer:
Homolytic cleavage is favoured in the presence of UV radiation or in presence of catalyst such as peroxides (H2O2) or at high temperatures.

Question 57.
Write a short note on free radical.
Answer:
Free radical:
i. A species with unpaired electron is called free radical.
OR
An uncharged species which is electrically neutral and which contains a single electron is called free radical.
ii. A free radical is highly reactive, unstable and therefore has a transitory existence (short-lived).
iii. Free radicals are formed as reaction intermediate which subsequently react with another radical/molecule to restore stable bonding pair.
iv. In a carbon free radical, the carbon atom having unpaired electron is sp hybridized and has planar trigonal geometry.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 86
v. The alkyl free radicals are classified as primary, secondary or tertiary depending upon the number of carbon atoms attached to the C-atom carrying the unpaired electron.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 87
vi. Stability of alkyl free radicals decreases in the order 3° > 2° > 1° > methyl free radical.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 58.
Explain heterolytic cleavage with suitable example.
Answer:
Heterolytic cleavage:
i. In hetcrolytic cleavage of a covalent bond, both shared electrons go to one of the two bonded atoms.
ii. This type of cleavage gives rise to two charged species, one with negative charge (anion) and the other with positive charge (cation).
iii. The negatively charged species has the more electronegative atom which has taken away the shared pair of electrons with it.
iv. Heterolytic cleavage can be represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 88
Where B is more electronegative than A and the movement of an electron pair is represented by a curved arrow.
v. Thus, the unsymmetrical breaking of a covalent bond between two atoms in such a way that the more electronegative atom acquires both the electrons of the shared pair. thereby fòrming charged ions is known as heterolytic fission or heterolysis.

Question 59.
What is carbocation? Explain with the help of an example and comment on the stability of carbocation.
Answer:
Carbocation:
i. A carbon atom having sextet of electrons and a positive charge is called a carbocation.
ii. They are unstable and highly reactive species formed as intermediates in many organic reactions.
iii. In a carbocation, the central carbon atom is sp2 hybridized and has trigonal planar geometry.
e. g. In a methyl carbocation C If, the positively charged carbon atom is covalently bonded to three hydrogen atoms. It is planar with H-C-H bond angle of 120°.
The unhybridized pz orbital is vacant and lies perpendicular to the plane containing the three sigma C-H bonds.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 89
iv. Carbocation are classified as primary (1°), secondary (2°) and tertiary (3°).
v. The stability of carbocations decreases in the order:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 90

Question 60.
Write a short note on carbanion.
Answer:
Carbanion:
i. Carbanion is a species with a negatively charged carbon atom having complete octet (eight electrons) in its valence shell.
ii. It is formed due to heterolytic bond fission when carbon atom is bonded to the more electropositive atom.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 91
(Where Z is more electropositive than C)
iii. Carbanions are unstable and highly reactive species formed as intermediates in many organic reactions.

Question 61.
Give the types of reagents used to carry out polar organic reactions.
Answer:
The polar organic reactions are brought about by two types of reagents.
Depending upon the ability to accept or donate electrons from or to the substrate, reagents are classified as

  1. Electrophiles (E+)
  2. Nucleophiles (Nu:)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 62.
Explain the term electrophile. Give examples.
Answer:
Electrophiles:
i. The species which accept electron pairs from the substrate during the reaction are called electrophiles.
ii. The electrophiles are electron seeking (or electron loving) species because they themselves are electron deficient.
iii. e.g. a. Positively charged/cationic electrophiles:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 92
b. Neutral species with vacant orbitals or incomplete octet of electrons in the outermost orbit: AlCl3, BF3, FeCl3, SO2, BeCl2, ZnCl2, PCl5, etc.
iv. A polyatomic electrophile has an electron deficient atom in it called the electrophilic centre.
e.g. The electrophilic centre of the electrophile AlCl3 is AlCl3 which has only 6 valence electrons.

Question 63.
Explain the term nucleophile. Give examples.
Answer:
Nucleophiles:
i. The species which donate (give away) electron pairs to the substrate during the reaction are called nucleophiles.
ii. Since, nucleophiles are electron rich species, they donate a pair of electrons to acceptor atoms and thus, they are nucleus seeking (or nucleus loving) species.
iii. e.g. a. Negatively charged nucleophiles: OH, CN, Cl, Br, etc.
b. Neutral species containing at least one lone pair of electrons:
H2O, NH3, H2S, R – OH, R – NH2, R – OR, etc.
iv. A polyatomic nucleophile has an electron rich atom in it called the nucleophilic centre.
e.g. The nucleophilic centre of the nucleophile H2O is ‘O’ which has two lone pairs of electrons.

Question 64.
Identify the nucleophile and electrophile from NH3 and \(\stackrel{+}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_{3}\). Also indicate the nucleophilic and electrophilic centres in them. Justify.
Answer:
The structural formulae of two reagents showing all the valence electrons are:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 93
Thus, NH3 contains N with a lone pair of electrons which can be given away to another species. Therefore, NH3 is a nucleophile and ‘N’ in it is the nucleophilic centre.
The \(\stackrel{+}{\mathrm{C}} \mathrm{H}_{3}\) is a positively charged electron deficient species having a vacant orbital on the carbon. It is an electrophile and the ‘C’ in it is the electrophilic centre.

Question 65.
What is the difference between nucleophilic reaction and electrophilic reaction. Give one example.
Answer:
In nucleophilic reaction nucleophile attacks the electrophilic centre in the substrate and brings about a nucleophilic reaction whereas, in electrophilic reaction an electrophile attacks a nucleophilic centre in the substrate and brings about an electrophilic reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 94
Here, the nucleophilic centre N: in the nucleophile NH3 attacks the electrophilic centre ‘B’ in the electrophile BF3 to form the product.
[Note: Given reaction is not an organic reaction.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 66.
How electrophilic or nucleophilic centre is generated in a neutral substrate?
Answer:

  • The displacement of valence electrons resulting in polarization of an organic molecule is called electronic effect.
  • Polarization can be either due to the presence of an atom or substituent group, or due to the influence of certain atornattacking reagent or due to the certain structural feature present in the molecule.
  • Such polarization results in the formation of electrophilic or nucleophilic centre in the neutral organic molecule.

Question 67.
Explain the difference between permanent electronic effect and temporary electronic effect.
Answer:
i. Permanent electronic effect:
The electronic effect that occurs in a substrate in the ground state is a permanent effect.
e.g. Inductive effect and resonance effect are two examples of permanent electronic effect.

ii. Temporary electronic effect:
The electronic effect that occurs in a substrate due to approach of the attacking reagent is a temporary effect. This type of electronic effect is called as electromeric effect or polarizability effect.

Question 68.
Define: Inductive effect
Answer:
Inductive effect: When an organic molecule has a polar covalent bond in its structure, polarity is induced in adjacent carbon-carbon single bonds too. This effect is called as inductive effect.

Question 69.
Describe inductive effect in detail.
Answer:
Inductive effect:
i. When an organic molecule has a polar covalent bond in its structure, polarity is induced in adjacent carbon- carbon single bonds too. This effect is called as inductive effect.

ii. For example, in chloroethane molecule, the covalent bond between ‘C’ and ‘Cl’ is a polar covalent bond whereas C-2 and C-1 bond (C-C bond) is expected to be nonpolar covalent bond. But, this bond acquires some polarity as chlorine is more electronegative than carbon. Chlorine pulls the bonding pair of electrons towards itself. Thus, the chlorine atom acquires a fractional negative charge, while the C-1 carbon atom acquires a fractional positive charge. As C-1 is further bonded to C-2, the positive polarity of C-1 pulls the shared pair of electrons of the C-2 – C-l bond more towards itself. As a result, a smaller positive charge is developed on C-2. Thus, the electron density gets displaced towards the chlorine atom not only along the [C-1 – Cl] bond, but also along the [C-2 – C-1] bond due to the inductive effect of Cl. This is represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 95

iii. The arrow head shown in the centre of the bond represents inductive effect. The direction of the arrow head indicates the direction of the permanent electron displacement along the sigma bond in the ground state.
iv. The inductive effect of an influencing group is transmitted along a chain of C-C bonds. However, this effect decreases rapidly with the increase in the number of intervening C-C single bonds and it becomes negligible beyond three C-C bonds.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 96

v. The direction of the inductive effect of a bonded group depends upon whether electron density of the bond is withdrawn from the bonded carbon or donated by the bonded carbon. On the basis of this ability, the groups/substituents are classified as either electron withdrawing (accepting) or electron donating (releasing) groups with respect to hydrogen.
e.g. In chloroethane, Cl withdraws electron density from the carbon chain and is electron withdrawing. Therefore, chlorine is said to exert an electron withdrawing inductive effect or negative inductive effect (-I effect) on the carbon chain.

vi. a. Substituents or groups that shows -I effect: -Cl, -NO2, -CN, -COOH, -COOR, -OAr, etc.
b. Substituents or groups that shows +I effect: Alkyl groups such as -CH3, -CH2CH3, etc.

Question 70.
Consider the following molecules and answer the questions:
CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Cl, CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Br, CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – I.
i. What type of inductive effect is expected to operate in these molecules?
ii. Identify the molecules from these three, having the strongest and the weakest inductive effect.
Answer:
i. The groups responsible for inductive effect in these molecules are -Cl, -Br and -I, respectively. All these are halogen atoms which are more electronegative than carbon. Therefore, all of them exert -I effect, that is, electron withdrawing inductive effect.
ii. The -I effect of halogens is due to their electronegativity. A decreasing order of electronegativity in these halogens follows Cl > Br > I. Therefore, the strongest -I effect is expected in CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Cl, while the weakest -I effect is expected for CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – I.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 71.
Which of the CH3 – CHCl2 and CH3CH2Cl is expected to have stronger -I effect?
Answer:
The group exerting -I effect is -Cl. In CH3CH2Cl, there is only one -Cl atom while in CH3 – CHCl2 there are two -Cl atoms. Therefore, CH3 – CHCl2 is expected to have strong -I effect.

Question 72.
Give an account of expected and observed values of carbon-carbon bond lengths in benzene.
Answer:

  • In cyclic structure of benzene, three alternating C – C single bonds and C=C double bonds are present.
  • Expected values of bond length of the C – C bond and C = C are 154 pm and 133 pm respectively.
  • Experimental measurements show that benzene has a regular hexagonal shape and all the six carbon-carbon bonds have the same bond length of 138 pm, which is intermediate between C – C single bond and C=C double bond.
  • This means that all the six carbon-carbon bonds in benzene are equivalent.

Note: Structure of benzene
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 97

Question 73.
What do you understand by the term conjugated system of π bonds?
Answer:
When Lewis structure of a compound has two or more multiple bonds alternating with single bonds, it is called a conjugated system of π bonds.
e.g. Benzene molecule
[Note: In such a system or in species having an atom carrying p orbital attached to a multiple bond, resonance theory is applicable.]

Question 74.
Identify the species that contains a conjugated system of π bonds. Explain your answer,
i. CH2 = CH – CH2 – CH = CH2
ii. CH2 = CH – CH = CH – CH3
Answer:
i. It does not contain conjugated system of π bonds, as the two C = C double bonds are separated by two C – C single bonds.
ii. It contains a conjugated system of π bonds, as the two C = C double bonds are separated by only one C – C single bond.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 75.
Explain in detail the important points of resonance theory.
Answer:
Resonance theory:
i. The π electrons in conjugated system of π bonds are not localized to a particular π bond.
ii. For a compound having a conjugated system of π bonds (or similar other systems), two or more Lewis structures are written by showing movement of π electrons (that is, delocalization of π electrons) using curved arrows.
The Lewis structures so generated are linked by double headed arrow and are called resonance structures or contributing structures or cononical structures of the species. Thus, two resonance structures can be drawn for benzene by delocalizing or shifting the π electrons :
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 98
iii. The positions of the carbon atoms in the conjugated system of π bonds remain unchanged, but the positions of π electrons are different in different resonance structures.
e.g. In the resonance structure I of benzene there is a single bond between C1 and C2 while in the resonance structure II there is a double bond between C1 and C2.

iv. Any resonance structure is hypothetical and does not by itself represent any real molecule and can explain all the properties of the compound. The real molecule has, however, character of all the resonance structures those can be written. The real or actual molecule is said to be the resonance hybrid of all the resonance structures.
e.g. An actual benezene molecule is the resonance hybrid of structures I and II and exhibit character of both these structures. Its approximate representation can be shown as a dotted.circle inscribed in a regular hexagon. Thus, each carbon-carbon bond in benzene has single as well as double bond character and the ring has a regular hexagonal shape.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 99
v. Hypothetical energy of an individual resonance structure can be calculated using bond energy values. The energy of actual molecule is, however, lower than that of any one of the resonance structures. In other words, resonance hybrid is more stable than any of the resonance structures. The difference in the actual energy and the lowest calculated energy of a resonance structure is called resonance stabilization energy or just resonance energy. Thus, resonance leads to stabilization of the actual molecule.

Question 76.
State the rules to be followed for writing resonating structures.
Answer:
Rules to be followed for writing resonating structures:

  1. Resonance structures can be written only when all the atoms involved in the n conjugated system lie in the same place.
  2. All the resonance structures must have the same number of unpaired electrons.
  3. Resonance structures contribute to the resonance hybrid in accordance to their energy or stability. More stable (having low energy) resonance structures contribute largely and thus are important.

Question 77.
What are the important points considered while selecting the most stable resonance structure if there are several contributing/resonance structures for a compound?
Answer:
When several resonance structures are compared, then the resonance structure is considered to be more stable if it has:

  • more number of covalent bonds,
  • more number of atoms with complete octet or duplet,
  • less separation, if any, of opposite charges,
  • negative charge, if any, on more electronegative atom and positive charge, if any, on more electropositive atom and
  • more dispersal of charge.

[Note: When all the resonance structures of a species are equivalent to each other, the species is highly resonance stabilized. For example, R – COO-, \(\mathrm{CO}_{3}^{2-}\)]

Question 78.
Write resonance structures of H – COO and comment on their relative stability.
Answer:
i. First the detailed bond structure of H – COO showing all the valence electron is drawn and then other resonance structures are generated using curved arrow to show movement of π-electrons.
ii. Two resonance structures are written for H – COO.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 100
Both the resonance structures I and II are equivalent to each other, and therefore, are equally stable.

Question 79.
Identify the species which has resonance stabilization. Justify your answer.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 101
Answer:
i. The bond structure shows that there is no π bond. Therefore, no resonance and no resonance stabilization.
ii.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 102
N = O double b5itd is attached to ‘O’ which carries lone pair of electrons in a p orbital.
Therefore, resonance structures can be written as shown and species is resonance stabilized.
iii.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 103
The Lewis structure shows two C = C double bonds alternating with a C – C single bond.
Therefore, resonance structures can be written as shown and the species is resonance stabilized.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 80.
Write three resonance structures for CH3 – CH = CH – CHO. Indicate their relative stabilities and explain.
Answer:
Three resonance structures are:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 104
Stability order: I > II > III
I: Contains more number of covalent bonds, each carbon atom and oxygen atom has complete octet, and involves no separation of opposite charges. Therefore, the most stable resonance structure.

II: Contains one covalent bond less than in I, one carbon (C+) has only 6 valence electrons, involves separation of opposite charges; the resonance structure II has -ve charge on more electronegative ‘O’ and +ve charge on more electropositive ‘C’. It has intermediate stability.

III: Contains one covalent bond less than in I, oxygen has only 6 valence electrons, involves separation of opposite charge, has -ve charge on the more electropositive ‘C’ and +ve charge on more electronegative ‘O’. All these factors are unfavourable for stability. Therefore, it is the least stable.

Question 81.
Define: Resonance effect.
Answer:
The polarity produced in the molecule by the interaction between conjugated n bonds (or that between n bond and p orbital on attached atom) is called the resonance effect or mesomeric effect.

Question 82.
Explain in short:
i. Positive resonance (+R) effect
ii. Negative resonance (-R) effect
Answer:
i. Positive resonance (+R) effect or electron donating/releasing resonance effect:
a. If the substituent group has a lone pair of electrons to donate to the attached K bond or conjugated system of π bonds, the effect is called +R effect.
b. The +R effect increases electron density at certain positions in a molecule.
e.g. +R effect in aniline increases the electron density at ortho and para positions.
c. Halogen, -OH, -OR, -O, -NH2, -NHR, -NR2, – NHCOR, -OCOR, etc. are the groups which show +R effect.

ii. Negative resonance (-R) effect:
a. If the substituent group has a tendency to withdraw electrons from the attached π bond or conjugated system of π bonds towards itself the effect is called -R effect.
b. The -R effect results in developing a positive polarity at certain positions in a molecule.
e.g. -R effect in nitrobenzene develops positive polarity at ortho and para positions.
c. -COOH, -CHO, – CO -, -CN, -NO2, -COOR, etc., are the groups which represent -R effect.

Question 83.
Draw resonance structures showing +R effect in aniline.
Answer:
The following resonance structures can be drawn for aniline:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 105

Question 84.
Draw resonance structures showing -R effect in nitrobenzene.
Answer:
The following resonance structures can be drawn for nitrobenzene:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 106

Question 85.
Write a note on electromeric effect.
Answer:
Electromeric effect:
i. This is a temporary electronic effect exhibited by multiple-bonded groups in the excited state in the presence of a reagent.
ii. When a reagent approaches a multiple bond, the electron pair gets completely shifted to one of the multiply, bonded atoms, giving a charge separated structure.
iii.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 107
This effect is temporary and disappears when the reagent is removed from the reacting system.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Question 86.
Explain the term hyperconjugation in short.
Answer:
Hyperconjugation:
i. Hyperconjugation is a permanent electronic effect.
ii. It explains the stability of a carbocation, free radical or alkenes.
iii. It involves delocalization of sigma electrons of a C – H bond of an alkyl group directly attached to a carbon atom, which is part of an unsaturated system or has an empty p orbital or a p orbital with an unpaired electron.
iv. Following species are stabilized by resonance:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 108

Question 87.
Explain hyperconjugation in ethyl carbocation.
Answer:
i. In ethyl cation \(\mathrm{CH}_{3} \stackrel{+}{\mathrm{CH}}_{2}\), positively charged carbon atom is attached to a methyl group.
ii. The positively charged carbon atom has six electrons; it is sp2 hybridized and has an empty p orbital available for hyperconjugation.
iii. One of the C – H bonds of the methyl group can align in plane of the empty p orbital. The sigma electrons constituting the C – H bond can be delocalized into this empty p orbital.
iv. Therefore, hyperconjugation arises due to the partial overlap of a C-H bond with the empty p orbital of an adjacent positively charged carbon atom. Thus, hyperconjugation is a σ-π conjugation.
v. Hyperconjugation structures in ethyl carbocation can be represented as:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 109
vi. In the contributing structures, there is no covalent bond shown between the carbon and one of the α-hydrogens. Hence, hyperconjugation is also called as ‘no bond resonance’.
vii. This type of overlap stabilizes the cation, because the electron density from the adjacent a bond helps in dispersing the positive charge.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 110

Question 88.
Explain the stability of tert-butyl cation, isopropyl cation, ethyl cation and methyl cation on the basis of hyperconjugation.
Answer:
i. Greater the number of alkyl groups attached to a positively charged carbon atom, more is the number of α-hydrogens, more is the hyperconjugation structures and more is the stability of the cation.

ii. Thus, the relative stability of the cations decreases in the order:
3° carbocation > 2° carbocation > 1° carbocation > Methyl cation
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 111

Question 89.
Explain hyperconjugation in propene.
Answer:
i. In propene, CH3 – CH = CH2, one of the sp2 hybridized carbon atom of the double bond is attached to sp3 hybridized carbon atom of methyl group.
ii. One of the C-H bonds of the methyl group can align in plane of the p orbital of sp2 hybridized C-atom and the electrons constituting the C-H bond in plane with this p orbital can then be delocalized into the p orbital.
iii. Therefore, hyperconjugation arises due to the partial overlap of a C-H bond with the p orbital of an adjacent sp2 hybridized carbon atom.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 112
iv. Hyperconjugation (no bond resonance) structures for propene can be represented as:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 113

Question 90.
Write the Lewis dot structures of but-1-ene and but-2-ene? Also, write the bond line formula of both the compounds.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 114

Question 91.
Due to contamination by viruses, the hospital authorities had asked Ranjan, the ward boy, to keep cleaning the hospital lobby using some antiseptic. Ranjan would wipe the floor by adding Dettol to water and would always keep the premises clean. One of the active ingredients in Dettol is chloroxylenol (4-chloro-3,5-dimethylphenol). Ranjan was also actively associated with an NGO, which was involved in Swachh Bharat campaign. Based on this passage, answer the following questions.
i. Which functional groups are present in chloroxylenol?
ii. Write the bond line and molecular formula of chloroxylenol.
iii. Identify one group each in chloroxylenol which show +I and -I effect, respectively.
Answer:
i. chloroxylenol is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 115
Functional groups present in chloroxylenol are chloro (-Cl) and phenolic -OH group.

ii. The bond line formula of chloroxylenol can be shown as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 116
Its molecular formula is C8H9OCl or C8H8ClOH

iii. Group which shows +I effect = -CH3; group which shows -I effect = -Cl

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Which of the following method can be used to represent 3-D structure of organic molecules?
i. Wedge formula
ii. Fischer projection formula
iii. Newman projection formula
iv. Sawhorse formula
(A) Only ii and iii.
(B) Only i and iii.
(C) Only iii and iv.
(D) All of the above
Answer:
(D) All of the above

2. Which one is the INCORRECT statement?
(A) Open chain compounds are called aliphatic compounds.
(B) Unsaturated compounds contain multiple bonds in them.
(C) Saturated hydrocarbons are called alkenes.
(D) Aromatic compounds possess a characteristic aroma.
Answer:
(C) Saturated hydrocarbons are called alkenes.

3. Choose the INCORRECT statement from the following.
(A) Cyclohexane is an alicyclic compound.
(B) Pyridine is a heterocyclic compound.
(C) Piperidine is an aromatic compound.
(D) Tropone is a non-benzenoid compound.
Answer:
(C) Piperidine is an aromatic compound.

4. Which of the following is NOT a cyclic compound?
(A) Anthracene
(B) Pyrrole
(C) Phenol
(D) Neopentane
Answer:
(D) Neopentane

5. Which of the following is a cycloalkane?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 117
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 118

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

6. Which one of the following could be a cyclic alkane?
(A) C5H5
(B) C3H6
(C) C4H6
(D) C2H6
Answer:
(B) C3H6

7. Which of the following is a heterocyclic compound?
(A) Naphthalene
(B) Thiophene
(C) Phenol
(D) Aniline
Answer:
(B) Thiophene

8. Which of the following is NOT aromatic?
(A) Benzene
(B) Toluene
(C) Cyclopentane
(D) Phenol
Answer:
(C) Cyclopentane

9. Cyclohexene is …………….
(A) aromatic
(B) alicyclic
(C) benzenoid
(D) aliphatic
Answer:
(B) alicyclic

10. An organic compound ‘X’ (molecular formula C6H7O2N) has six carbons in a ring system, two double bonds and also a nitro group as a substituent, ‘X’ is …………..
(A) homocyclic and aromatic
(B) homocyclic but not aromatic
(C) heterocyclic
(D) aromatic but not homocyclic
Answer:
(B) homocyclic but not aromatic

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

11. Which of the following structure represents an aldehyde?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 119
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 120

12. A member of a homologous series differs from immediate above or below member by …………… group.
(A) – CH3
(B) – CH2
(C) – CH2CH3
(D) – C6H5
Answer:
(B) – CH2

13. Which of the following is NOT a branched chain alkyl group?
(A) Isobutyl group
(B) n-Butyl group
(C) sec-Butyl group
(D) tert-Butyl group
Answer:
(B) n-Butyl group

14. In IUPAC nomenclature, the number which indicates the position of the substituent is called ………….
(A) locant
(B) delocant
(C) prefix
(D) suffix
Answer:
(A) locant

15. The IUPAC name of the following compound is …………..
(A) 1,1 -dimethyl-2-ethylcyclohexane
(B) 2-ethyl-1,1 -dimethylcyclohexane
(C) 1 -ethyl-2,2-dimethylcyclohexane
(D) 2,2-dimethyl-1-ethylcyclohexane
Answer:
(B) 2-ethyl-1,1 -dimethylcyclohexane

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

16. Which is the CORRECT name of ………….
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry 121
(A) Propyl ethanoate
(B) Ethyl propanoate
(C) Methyl butanoate
(D) Butyl methanoate
Answer:
(C) Methyl butanoate

17. Homolytic fission is NOT favourable in presence of …………..
(A) UV light
(B) catalyst like peroxide
(C) polar solvent
(D) high temperature
Answer:
(C) polar solvent

18. The total number of electrons in the carbon atom of methyl free radical is ………….
(A) six
(B) seven
(C) eight
(D) nine
Answer:
(B) seven

19. The most unstable carbocation amongst the following is ……………
(A) (CH3)3C+
(B) (CH3)2CH+
(C) CH3 – CH2+
(D) CH3+
Answer:
(D) CH3+

20. Which of the following represents a pair of electrophiles?
(A) BF3, H2O
(B) AlCl3, NH3
(C) CN, ROH
(D) BF3, AlCl3
Answer:
(D) BF3, AlCl3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 14 Basic Principles of Organic Chemistry

21. This group shows +I effect.
(A) -Br
(B) -CN
(C) -COOH
(D) -CH2CH3
Answer:
(D) -CH2CH3

22. Which of the following group shows negative resonance effect?
(A) -O-
(B) -COOH
(C) -NHCOR
(D) -NH2
Answer:
(B) -COOH

23. Resonance is NOT exhibited by ………….
(A) phenol
(B) aniline
(C) nitrobenzene
(D) cyclohexane
Answer:
(D) cyclohexane

24. All bonds in benzene are equal due to ………….
(A) tautomerism
(B) metamerism
(C) resonance
(D) isomerism
Answer:
(C) resonance

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 1.
Explain the term nuclear chemistry. Give few examples of nuclear reactions.
Answer:
Nuclear chemistry is a branch of physical chemistry and it deals with the study of reactions involving changes in atomic nuclei. This branch started with the discovery of natural radioactivity by physicist Antoine Henri Becquerel.

Examples of nuclear reactions are as follows:

  • Radioactive decay
  • Artificial transmutation
  • Nuclear fission
  • Nuclear fusion

Question 2.
Write a short note on similarity between the solar system and structure of atom.
Answer:
Solar system: It consists of the Sun and planets in which Sun is at the centre of solar system and planets move around it under the force of gravity.

Atomic system: It consists of tiny central core called as nucleus at the centre of atom around which electrons are present. Like in solar system, electrostatic attractions hold subatomic particles in a structure of atom. The nucleus consists of protons and neutrons.

Question 3.
Answer the following.
i. Give the symbolic representation for calcium, (no. of protons = 20, mass number = 40)
ii. Calculate the number of neutrons for calcium.
Answer:
i. \({ }_{20}^{40} \mathrm{Ca}\), in which Z = 20 and A = 40.
ii. Number of neutrons: It can be calculated from formula (A = Z + N).
For calcium, N = A – Z = 40 – 20 = 20
Nucleus of the calcium atom contains 20 neutrons.

Question 4.
Explain the term nucleons with examples.
Answer:
The term nucleon refers to the sum of protons (p) and neutrons (n) present in atom, e.g. Number of nucleons present in \({ }_{20}^{40} \mathrm{Ca}\) are 40 (i.e., 20 protons and 20 neutrons). Number of nucleons present in \({ }_{11}^{23} \mathrm{Na}\) are 23 (i.e., 11 protons and 12 neutrons).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 5.
Define: Nuclide
Answer:
The nucleus of a specific isotope is called as nuclide.

Question 6.
Atom as a whole is electrically neutral. Justify.
Answer:

  • The magnitude of electronic charge (e) on the nucleus is +Ze and that of outer sphere is -Ze. Number of protons and number of electrons are always equal in an atom.
  • As a result of this, the charges get nullified, therefore, the atom as a whole is electrically neutral.

Question 7.
Define:
i. Isotopes
ii. Isobars
Answer:
i. Isotopes: Nuclides which contain same number of protons but different number of neutrons in their nuclei are called as isotopes. e.g. \({ }_{11}^{22} \mathrm{Na}\), \({ }_{11}^{23} \mathrm{Na}\) and \({ }_{11}^{24} \mathrm{Na}\)
ii. Isobars: Nuclides (of different element) which have same mass number but have different number of protons and neutrons in their nuclei are called as isobars.
OR
The atoms of different elements having the same mass number but different atomic numbers are called isobars.
e.g. \({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}\) and \({ }_{7}^{14} \mathrm{N}\)

Question 8.
Define mirror nuclei and isotones.
Answer:

  • Isobars in which the number of protons and neutrons differ by 1 unit and are interchanged are called as mirror nuclei.
  • Isotones are defined as nuclides having the same number of neutrons but different number of protons and hence, different mass numbers.

Question 9.
Name the following.
i. Nuclides in which number of protons and neutrons differ by 1 and are interchanged.
ii. Nuclides having the same number of neutrons but different number of protons.
iii. Nuclides with the same mass number which differ in energy states.
Answer:
i. Mirror nuclei
ii. Isotones
iii. Nuclear isomers

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 10.
Explain the term nuclear isomers?
Answer:

  • The nuclides with the same number of protons (Z) and neutrons (N) or the same mass number (A) which differ in energy states are called nuclear isomers.
  • In this, the isomer of higher energy is said to be in the metastable state which is represented by writing “m” after the mass number.
    e.g. Nuclear isomers of cobalt can be represented as, 60mCo and 60Co.

Question 11.
State true or false. Correct the false statement.
i. The number of nucleons in C-12 atom is 6.
ii. N-13 and C-13 are mirror nuclei.
iii. Nuclear isomers have same number of protons and neutrons.
Answer:
i. False,
The number of nucleons in C-12 atom is 12.
ii. True
iii. True

Question 12.
Give classification of nuclides on the basis of nuclear stability.
Answer:
Nuclides can be classified into stable and unstable/radioactive nuclides on the basis of nuclear stability.

  • Stable nuclides: In this type of nuclides, the number of electrons and the location of nuclei may change in outer sphere but the number of protons and neutrons remain unchanged.
  • Radioactive (unstable) nuclides: These nuclides undergo spontaneous change forming new nuclides.

Question 13.

Number of protons (Z) Number of neutrons (N) Number of such nuclides
i. Even Even 165
ii. Even Odd 55

What conclusion can be drawn from the above given data?
Answer:

  • Number of nuclides with even ‘Z’ and even ‘N’ are higher in number as compared to nuclides with even ‘Z’ and odd ‘N’
  • Nuclides with even number of ‘Z’ and odd number of ‘N’ are about 1/3rd of nuclides where both ‘Z’ and ‘N’ are even.
  • Nuclides with even number of protons (Z) and even number of neutrons (N) are most stable. These nuclides tend to fonn proton-proton and neutron-neutron pairs. This impart stability to the nucleus.

Question 14.
Write a note on naturally occurring nuclides with either odd number of protons or odd number of neutrons.
Answer:
i. The number of stable nuclides with either Z or N odd is about one third of nuclides where both are even.
ii. These nuclides are less stable than those having even number of protons and neutrons.
iii. In these nuclides one nucleon has no partner and therefore, these nuclides are less stable.
iv. Further the number of nuclides with odd A are nearly the same, irrespective of Z or N is odd. This indicates that protons and neutrons behave similarly in the respect of stability.
v. Following table gives the estimate of such nuclides occurring in nature.

Number of protons (Z) Number of neutrons (N) Number of such nuclides
i. Even Odd 55
ii. Odd Even 50

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 15.
State true or false. Correct the false statements.
i. The nuclides with even Z and even N constitute 85% of earth crust.
ii. Nuclides with either ‘Z’ or ‘N’ odd are more stable than those having even number of both ‘Z’ and ‘N’
iii. The number of nuclides with odd number of ‘Z’ and odd number of ‘N’ are only four.
Answer:
i. True
ii. False
Nuclides with either ‘Z’ or ‘N’ odd are less stable than nuclides having even number of both ‘Z’ and ‘N’.
iii. True

Question 16.
Heavier nuclides require greater number of neutrons (than protons) to attain stability. Justify.
Answer:

  • The heavier nuclides with the increasing number of protons lead to large coulombic repulsions.
  • Increased number of neutrons will separate the protons within the nuclei, which will impart stability. Thus, in order to attain stability heavier nuclide need more number of neutrons.

Question 17.
Consider the graph of neutron (N) plotted against proton number (Z). How will you identify radioactive nuclides from the graph?
Answer:
Nuclides which fall outside the belt or stability zone are radioactive nuclides.

Question 18.
Write a note Magic numbers.
Answer:
Magic numbers: The nuclei with 2, 8, 20, 28, 50, 82 and 126 neutrons or protons are particularly stable and abundant in nature. These numbers are known as magic numbers.
e.g. Lead (\({ }_{82}^{208} \mathrm{~Pb}\)) has two magic numbers, 82 protons and 126 neutrons.

Question 19.
What is the order of distance between two protons present in the nucleus?
Answer:
The order of distance between two protons present in the nucleus is typically of order of 10-15 m.

Question 20.
Which factor is responsible for nuclear stability?
Answer:
Nuclear forces of attractions exist within nuclei. These are attractions between proton-proton (p-p), neutron-neutron(n-n) and proton-neutron(p-n). They constitute or give rise to nuclear potential which is responsible for nuclear stability.

Question 21.
Write short notes on: nuclear potential.
Answer:

  • Nuclear potential is the attraction between p-p, n-n and p-n.
  • These attractive forces are independent of the charge on nucleons or attraction between p-p, n-n and p-n are equal.
  • These attractive forces operate over short range within the nucleus.
  • Nuclear potential is responsible for the nuclear stability.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 22.
State true or false. Correct the false statement.
i. The nuclear forces of attractions are dependent on the charge on the nucleons.
ii. The actual mass of an atom is observed to be more than sum of the masses of its constituents.
Answer:
i. False
The nuclear forces of attractions are independent of the charge on the nucleons.
ii. False
The actual mass of an atom is observed to be less than sum of the masses of its constituents.

Question 23.
Define: Nuclear binding energy
Answer:
An energy equivalent to the mass lost is released during the formation of nucleus. This is called the nuclear binding energy.
OR
The energy requiredfor holding the nucleons together within the nucleus of an atom is called as the nuclear binding energy.

Question 24.
Explain the term: mass defect.
Answer:
During the formation of nucleus, certain mass is lost. This phenomenon is known as mass defect (Δm).
The exact mass of nucleus is slightly less than sum of the exact masses of the constituent nucleons. This difference is called as mass defect. It is represented by symbol Δm.
Formulae: Δm = calculated mass – observed mass

Question 25.
Explain the relation between nuclear mass and energy? Also give the energy released in the conversion of one atomic mass unit into energy.
Answer:
i. The nuclear mass is expressed in atomic mass unit (u) which is exactly 1/12th of the mass of 12C atom. Thus, u = 1/12th mass of C-12 atom = 1.66 × 10-2 kg.
ii. The conversion of mass into energy is established through Einstein’s equation, E = mc2.
Where m is the mass of matter converted into energy (E) and velocity of light (c).
iii. The energy released in the conversion of one u mass into energy is given by:
E = mc2 = (1.66 × 10-27kg) × (3 × 108 m s-1)2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 26.
Derive the expression for nuclear binding energy for a nuclide.
Answer:
Expression for nuclear binding energy:
i. Consider a nuclide \({ }_{z}^{A} X\) that contains Z protons and (A – Z) neutrons. Suppose the mass of the nuclide is m. The mass of proton is mp and that of neutron is mn.

ii. Total mass = (A – Z)mn + Zmp + Zme …..(1)
Δm = [(A – Z)mn + Zmp + Zme] – m
= [(A – Z)mn + Z(mp + me] – m
= [(A – Z)mn + ZmH] – m …..(2)
Where (mp + me) = mH = mass of H atom.
Thus, (Δm) = [Zmp + (A – Z)mn] – m
Where Z = atomic number
A = mass number
(A – Z) = neutron number
mp and mn = masses of proton and neutron, respectively
m = mass of nuclide

iii. The mass defect, Δm is related to binding energy of nucleus by Einstein’s equation,
ΔE = Δm × c2
Where, ΔE = Binding energy, Δm = mass defect.
iv. Nuclear energy is measured in million electro volt (MeV).
v. The total binding energy is then given by,
B.E. = Δm (u) × 931.4
Where 1.00 u = 931.4 MeV
B.E. = 931.4 [ZmH + (A – Z)mn – m] ……(3)
Total binding energy of nucleus containing A nucleons is the B.E.
vi. The binding energy per nucleon is then given by,
\(\bar{B}\) = B.E./A

Question 27.
Calculate the mean binding energy per nucleon for the formation of \({ }_{8}^{16} \mathrm{O}\) nucleus. The mass of oxygen atom is 15.994 u. The masses of H atom and neutron are 1.0078 u and 1.0087 u, respectively.
Solution:
Given: mH = 1.0078 u
mn= 1.0087 u
m= 15.994 u
Z = 8, A= 16
To find: Mean binding energy per nucleon (\(\bar{B}\))
Formulae: i. Δm = ZmH + (A – Z)mn – m
ii. B.E. = Δm × 931.4 MeV
iii. \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{\mathrm{B} . \mathrm{E} .}{\mathrm{A}}\)
Calculation: i. The mass defect, Δm = ZmH + (A – Z)mn – m
Δm = 8 × 1.0078 u + 8 × 1.0087 u – 15.994 u = 0.138 u
ii. Total binding energy, B.E. (MeV) = Δm (amu) × 931.4
Hence, B.E. = 0.138 × 931.4 = 128.533 MeV
iii. Binding energy per nucleon, \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{\mathrm{B} . \mathrm{E} .}{\mathrm{A}}\)
Hence, \(\bar{B}\) = \(\frac{128.533}{16}\) = 8.033 MeV/nucleon
Ans: Binding energy per nucleon for the formation of \({ }_{8}^{16} \mathrm{O}\) nucleus = 8.033 MeV/nucleon

Question 28.
Calculate the binding energy per nucleon for the formation of \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) nucleus. Mass of \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) atom = 4.0026 u.
Solution:
Given: m = 4.0026 u
Z = 2, A = 4
To find: Binding energy per nucleon (\(\bar{B}\))
Formulae: i. Δm = ZmH + (A – Z)mn – m
ii. B.E. = Δm × 931.4 MeV
iii. \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{\mathrm{B} . \mathrm{E} .}{\mathrm{A}}\)
The mass defect, Δm = [ZmH + (A – Z)mn] – m
Δm = [(2 × 1.0078) + (2 × 1.0087)] – 4.0026 = 0.0304 u
Total binding energy, B.E. (MeV) = Δm (amu) × 931.4
= 0.0304 × 931.4
= 28.315 MeV
iii. B.E. per nucleon, \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}=\frac{\mathrm{B} . \mathrm{E} .}{\mathrm{A}}\)
\(\bar{B}\) = \(\frac{28.315}{4}\) = 7.079 Mey/nucleon
Ans: Binding energy per nucleon for formation of \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\) nucleus = 7.079 MeV/nucleon

Question 29.
Define radioactivity and give examples of two radioactive elements.
Answer:
Radioactivity is a phenomenon in which the nuclei spontaneously emit a nuclear particle and gamma radiation transforming to a different nuclide. e.g. Uranium and radium
[Note: Radioactivity is the phenomenon related to the nucleus.]

Question 30.
What is the criteria for an element to be known as radioactive element?
Answer:

  • An element is considered to be radioactive if the nuclei of its atoms are unstable.
  • That is, when element undergoes nuclear changes (i.e., emission of nuclear particles and gamma radiation), it is said to be radioactive.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 31.
What are the different types of radiations emitted by radioactive element?
Answer:
The radiations emitted by radioactive elements are as follows:

  • Alpha (α) radiations
  • Beta (β) radiations
  • Gamma (γ) radiations

Question 32.
Write the unit of rate of decay.
Answer:
The rate of decay is expressed in the form of disintegrations per second (dps).

Question 33.
Derive the equation λ = \(\frac{\left(-\frac{\mathbf{d} \mathbf{N}}{\mathbf{d} \mathbf{t}}\right)}{\mathbf{N}}\) and write what does λ denotes.
Answer:
The rate of decay of a radioelement at any instant is proportional to the number of nuclei (atoms) present at that instant. It can be represented as,
\(-\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{dt}} \propto \mathrm{N} \quad \text { or }-\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\lambda \mathrm{N}\) …….(i)
Where, \(-\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = Rate of decay at any time, t
λ = Decay constant
N = Number of nuclei (atoms) present at time, t
From equation (i),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 1
Decay constant (λ) is the fraction of nuclei decaying in unit time.
OR
It is the ratio of the amount of substance disintegrated per unit time to the amount of substance present at that time.

Question 34.
Derive the expression for decay constant.
Answer:
Decay constant (λ) is the fraction of nuclei decaying in unit time.
Thus,
λ = \(-\frac{d N}{d t} \times \frac{1}{N}\) …(i)
Rearranging equation (i) we get,
\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}}\) = -λ dt
On integrating above equation, we get
∫\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}}\) = -∫ λ dt …(ii)
On performing the integration, we get lnN = -λt + C ……(iii)
where C is the constant of integration whose value is obtained as follows:
Let N0 be the number of nuclei present at some arbitrary zero time. At time t, the number of nuclei is N. So, at t = 0, N = N0, substituting in equation (iii), we get
lnN0 = C
With this value of C, equation (iii) becomes
lnN = -λt + lnN0
or λt = lnN0 – InN = ln \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{0}}{\mathrm{~N}}\) ……(iv)
Hence, λ = \(\frac{1}{t} \ln \frac{N_{0}}{N}\) …….(v)
Converting natural logarithm (ln) to logarithm to the base 10, equation (v) becomes
λ = \(\frac{2.303}{t} \log _{10} \frac{N_{0}}{N}\) ………(vi)
The equation (iv) can be expressed as ln \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{0}}{\mathrm{~N}}\) = -λt. Taking antilog of both sides, we get
\(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{N}_{0}}=\mathrm{e}^{-\lambda \mathrm{t}} \text { or } \mathrm{N}=\mathrm{N}_{0} \mathrm{e}^{-\lambda t}\) …….(vii)
The equation (vi) and equation (vii) give the decay constant.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 35.
Write a note on half-life of a radioelement.
Answer:

  • Half-life of a radioelement (t1/2): It is the time needed for a given number of nuclei (atoms) of radioelement to decay exactly to half of its initial value.
  • Each radio isotope has its own half-life.
  • Half-life of a radioelement can be expressed in seconds, minutes, hours, days or years.
  • Mathematical expression for half-life of a radioelement can be given as,
    \(t_{1 / 2}=\frac{0.693}{\lambda}\)

Question 36.
Complete the following statements based on the given graph.
i. As decay progresses, the number of radioactive atoms will ……….. with time.
ii. As decay progresses, the rate of decay will …………..
iii. Rate of radioactive decay at any instant is ………… to the number of atoms of the radioactive element present at that instant.
Answer:
i. decrease
ii. decrease
iii. proportional

Question 37.
218Po decays initially at a rate of 816 dps. The rate falls to 408 dps after 24 min. Calculate the decay constant.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 3

Question 38.
After how many seconds will the concentration of radioactive element X will be halved, if the decay constant is 1.155 × 10-3 s-1?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 4
Ans: Concentration of radioactive element (X) will be halved in 600 s.

Question 39.
41Ar decays initially at a rate of 575 Bq. The rate falls to 358 dps after 75 minutes. What is the half-life of 41Ar?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 5
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 6
Ans: The half-life of Ar is 109.7 min.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 40.
The half-life of 32P is 14.26 d. What percentage of 32P sample will remain after 40 d?
Solution:
Given: t1/2 = 14.26 d,
N0 = 100,
t = 40 d
To find: Percentage of 32P sample remaining after 40 d
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 7
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 8

Question 41.
The half-life of 34Cl is 1.53 s. How long does it take for 99.9 % of sample of 34Cl to decay?
Solution:
Given: t1/2 = = 1.53 s,
N0 = 100,
N = 100 – 99.9 = 0.1,
To find: Time (t)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 9

Question 42.
The half-life of 209Po is 102 y. How much of 1 mg sample of polonium decays in 62 y?
Solution:
Given: t1/2 = 102y,
t = 62 y,
N0 = 1 mg
To find: Amount of polonium that decayed in 62 y
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 10
Taking antilog of both sides we get,
\(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{0}}{\mathrm{~N}}\) = antilog (0.1829) = 1.524
N = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}_{0}}{1.524}=\frac{1 \mathrm{mg}}{1.524}\) = 0.656 mg
N is the amount that remains after 62 y.
Hence, the amount decayed in 62 y = 1 mg – 0.656 mg = 0.344 mg
Ans: The amount decayed in 62 y is 0.344 mg

Question 43.
What will be the approximate time taken for 90 % decay of 174Ir in terms of its half-life?
Solution:
Given: N0 = 100
N = 100 – 90 = 10
To find: Time (t)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 11
Ans: Thus, the approximate time required for 90 % decay of 174Ir in terms of its half-life is 3.3t1/2.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 44.
A radioactive decay of element X (Z = 35) is 30 % complete in 2 hours. Calculate its half-life period.
Solution:
Given: t = 2 hrs,
N0 = 100
N= 100 – 30 = 70
To find: t1/2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 12

Question 45.
What are the different modes by which radio elements decay?
Answer:
There are 3 modes by which radio elements decay: α-decay, β-decay and γ-emission.

Question 46.
What is α-decay?
Answer:
Radioactive isotope/radioelement when undergoes decay by the emission of α-particle from the nuclei then the process involved is referred to as α-decay.

Question 47.
Give equation for radium-222 when it undergoes decay by emission of an α-particle.
\({ }_{88}^{226} \mathrm{Ra} \longrightarrow{ }_{86}^{222} \mathrm{X}+{ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\)
Answer:
\({ }_{88}^{226} \mathrm{Ra} \longrightarrow{ }_{86}^{222} \mathrm{X}+{ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\)
Thus, atomic number of element ‘X’ will be 86 and atomic mass number will be 222.

Question 48.
Identify the mode of decay and state whether following equation is CORRECT or NOT. Justify.
\({ }_{92}^{238} \mathbf{U} \longrightarrow{ }_{90}^{234} \mathrm{Th}+{ }_{2}^{4} \mathbf{H e}\)
Ans:
i. It involves α-decay process.
ii. As uranium undergoes decay by emission of an α-particle (i.e., \({ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}\)), daughter nuclei (in this case thorium) ‘will observe the decrease in atomic number by 2 units and decrease in atomic mass number by 4 units.
Hence, the given equation is correct.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 49.
If radioactive element ‘X’ undergoes α-emission then what will be the position of daughter nuclei in the periodic table with respect to element ‘X’.
Answer:
If radioactive element ‘X’ undergoes α-emission, then corresponding daughter nuclei formed will occupy two places to the left of the periodic table with respect to element ‘X’.

Question 50.
What is β – decay? Also explain the changes that occur in the parent nuclei due to β-emission with one example.
Answer:
β – decay: The emission of negatively charged stream of β particles from the nucleus is called β – decay.
i. β – Particles are electrons with a charge and mass of an electron, mass being negligible as compared to the nuclei.
ii. When a nucleus decays by emitting a high-speed electron called a beta particle (β), a new nucleus is formed with the same mass number as the original nucleus and with an atomic number that is one unit greater than the parent nuclei.
General equation:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 13
Note: The mass number A does not change, the atomic number changes when a nuclei undergoes β-decay. e.g. Neptunium-238 decays to form plutonium-238:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 14

Question 51.
Mention the atomic number and atomic mass number of the parent radioelement ‘X’ in the following case if parent nuclei undergo β-emission.
i. \(\mathrm{X} \longrightarrow{ }_{94}^{238} \mathrm{Pu}\)
ii. \(\mathrm{X} \longrightarrow{ }_{95}^{241} \mathrm{Am}\)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 15

Question 52.
How many α and β-particles are emitted in the following?
\({ }_{93}^{237} \mathrm{~Np} \longrightarrow{ }_{83}^{209} \mathrm{Bi}\)
Answer:
The emission of one α-particle decreases the mass number by 4 whereas the emission of β particles has no effect on mass number.
Net decrease in mass number = 237 – 209 = 28. This decrease is only due to α- particles. Hence, number of α- particles emitted = \(\frac {28}{4}\) = 7
Now, the emission of one α-particle decreases the atomic number by 2 and one β-particle emission increases it by 1.
The net decrease in atomic number = 93 – 83 = 10
The emission of 7 α-particles causes decrease in atomic number by 14. However, the actual decrease is only 10. It means atomic number increases by 4. This increase is due to emission of 4 β-particles.
Thus, 7 α and 4 β- particles are emitted.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 53.
Explain the process of γ-decay in detail with a suitable example.
Answer:
γ-decay:
i. γ-Radiation is always accompanied with α and β decay processes.
ii. During γ-radiation, the daughter nucleus is left in energetically excited state which decays to the ground state of product with emission of γ-rays.
For example, \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U} \longrightarrow{ }_{90}^{234} \mathrm{Th}+{ }_{2}^{4} \mathrm{He}+\gamma\)
iii. \({ }_{92}^{238} \mathrm{U}\) emits α-particles of two different energies, 4.147 MeV (23%) and 4.195 MeV (77%).
iv. When α-particles of energy 4.147 MeV are emitted, 234Th is left in an excited state which de-excites to the ground state with emission of γ-ray photons with energy 0.0048 MeV.

Question 54.
Half-life of 209Po is 102 y. How many α-particles are emitted in 1 s from 2 mg sample of Po?
Solution:
Given: t1/2 = 102 y,
t = 1 s,
Amount of sample = 2 mg
To find: Number of α-particles emitted
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 16

Question 55.
Nuclear transmutation is a spontaneous or non-spontaneous process?
Answer:
Nuclear transmutation is a non-spontaneous (man-made) process.

Question 56.
What is nuclear transmutation?
Answer:
Nuclear transmutation:

  • It is the process of transformation of a stable nucleus into another nucleus which can be stable or unstable.
  • It can occur by the radioactive decay of a nucleus or the reaction of a nucleus with another particle.

Question 57.
Differentiate between chemical reactions and nuclear reactions.
Answer:
Chemical reactions:

  • Rearrangement of atoms by breaking and forming of chemical bonds.
  • Different isotopes of an element have same behaviour.
  • Only outer shell electrons take part in the chemical reaction.
  • The chemical reaction is accompanied by relatively small amounts of energy.
    e.g. chemical combustion of 1.0 g methane releases only 56 kJ energy.
  • The rates of reaction are influenced by the temperature, pressure, concentration and catalyst.

Nuclear reactions:

  • Elements or isotopes of one element are converted into another element in a nuclear reaction.
  • Isotopes of an element behave differently.
  • In addition to electrons, protons, neutrons, other elementary particles may be involved.
  • The nuclear reaction is accompanied by a large amount of energy change, e.g. The nuclear transformation of 1 g of Uranium – 235 release 8.2 × 107 kJ
  • The rate of nuclear reactions is unaffected by temperature, pressure and catalyst.

Question 58.
What will happen when a nucleus of J’B is bombarded with α-particle? Identify the process involved.
Answer:
i. When a stable nucleus of \({ }_{5}^{10} \mathrm{~B}\) is is bombarded with α-particle, it transforms into \({ }_{7}^{13} \mathrm{~N}\), which is radioactive and spontaneously emits positrons to produces \({ }_{6}^{13} \mathrm{C}\).
This can be represented as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 17
ii. The process involved is known as induced radioactivity or artificial radioactivity.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 59.
Define: Nuclear fission
Answer:
Nuclear fission is defined as a process which involves splitting of the heavy nucleus of an atom into two nearly equal fragments accompanied by release of the large amount of energy.

Question 60.
Nuclear fission of 235U is a chain process. Justify.
Answer:

  • Nuclear fission of 235U occurs when nucleus absorbs neutron. When a uranium nucleus absorbs neutron, it breaks into two lighter fragments and releases energy (heat), more neutrons, and other radiation.
  • When one uranium 235 nucleus undergoes fission, three neutrons are emitted.
  • These neutrons emitted in fission cause more fission of the uranium nuclei which yield more neutrons. These neutrons again bring forth fission producing further neutrons.
  • The process continues indefinitely leading to chain reaction which continues even after the removal of bombarding neutrons.

Question 61.
Explain the term: Nuclear fusion and give one example.
Answer:
Nuclear fusion: In this process, the lighter nuclei combine (fuse) together and form a heavy nucleus which is accompanied by an enormous amount of energy.
e. g. The energy received by earth from the sun is due to the nuclear fusion reactions.

Question 62.
Which will produce more energy: Nuclear fission or fusion?
Answer:
Nuclear fusion will produce relatively more energy per given mass of fuel.

Question 63.
What is the range of temperature required to carry out nuclear fusion reaction?
Answer:
Nuclear fusion reaction requires extremely high temperature typically of the order of 108 K.

Question 64.
Distinguish between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
Answer:
Nuclear fission:

  • It is the process in which a heavy nucleus splits up into two lighter nuclei of nearly equal masses.
  • About 200 MeV of energy is available per fission in case of \({ }_{92}^{235} \mathrm{U}\).
  • The products of nuclear fission are, in general, radioactive.

Nuclear fusion:

  • It is the process in which two lighter nuclei combine together to form a heavy nucleus.
  • Energy available per fusion is much less but the energy per unit mass of material is much greater than that for fission of heavy nuclei.
  • The products of fusion are, in general, non-radioactive.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 65.
Estimate the energy released in the fusion reaction.
\({ }_{1}^{2} \mathbf{H}+{ }_{2}^{3} \mathbf{H e} \longrightarrow{ }_{2}^{4} \mathbf{H e}+{ }_{1}^{1} \mathbf{H}\)
(Given atomic masses: 2H = 2.0141 u. 3He = 3.0160 u, 4He = 4.0026 u, 1H = 1.0078 u)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 18

Question 66.
Explain the term: Radiocarbon dating in detail.
Answer:
Radiocarbon dating: The technique is used to find the age of historic and archaeological organic samples such as old wood samples and animal or human fossils.
Radioisotope used for carbon dating is 14C.
i. Radioactive 14C is formed in the upper atmosphere by bombardment of neutrons from cosmic ray on 14N.
\({ }_{7}^{14} \mathrm{~N}+{ }_{0}^{1} \mathrm{n} \longrightarrow{ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C}+{ }_{1}^{1} \mathrm{H}\)
ii. 14C combines with atmospheric oxygen to form 14CO2 which mixes with ordinary 12CO2.
iii. This carbon dioxide is absorbed by plants during photosynthesis.
iv. Animals eat plants which have absorbed a carbon dioxide (14CO2 + 12CO2). Hence, 14C becomes a part of plant and animal bodies.
v. As long as the plant is alive, the ratio 14C/12C remains constant.
vi. When the plant dies, photosynthesis will not occur and the ratio 14C/12C decreases with the decay of radioactive 14C which has a half-life 5730 years.
vii. The decay process of 14C is given below:
\({ }_{6}^{14} \mathrm{C} \longrightarrow{ }_{7}^{14} \mathrm{~N}+{ }_{-1}^{0} \mathrm{e}\)
viii. The activity (N) of given wood sample and that of fresh sample of live plant (N0) is measured, where, N0 denotes the activity of the given sample at the time of death.
ix. The age of the given wood sample, can be determined by applying following Formulae:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 19

Question 67.
What is nuclear power?
Answer:
Nuclear power is the electricity generated from the fission of uranium and plutonium.

Question 68.
Nuclear power is a clean source of energy. Justify.
Answer:
Nuclear power offers huge environmental benefits in producing electricity because,

  • it releases zero carbon dioxide.
  • it releases zero sulphur and nitrogen oxides.
  • these are atmospheric pollutants which pollute the air.

Thus, nuclear power is a clean source of energy.

Question 69.
How much energy will be produced by fission of 1 gram of 235U?
Answer:
Fission of 1 gram of uranium-235 produces about 24,000 kW/h of energy.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 70.
Nuclear fission is an alternative energy source. Explain.
Answer:

  • Fission of 1 gram of uranium-235 produces about 24,000 kW/h of energy.
  • This is the same amount of energy produced by burning 3 tons of coal or 12 barrels of oil, or nearly 5000 m3 of natural gas.
  • The sources like coal, oil, natural gas are depleting very fast.
  • Also, the costs of petrol and other products from petroleum industry is increasing.
  • Thus, we need to depend on the nuclear fission as an alternative source of energy for electricity.

Question 71.
Label the follow ing diagram of simplified nuclear reactor.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 20
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 21

Question 72.
Explain in brief: Nuclear reactor
Answer:
Nuclear reactor: Nuclear reactor is a device for using atomic energy in controlled manner for peaceful purposes. During nuclear fission energy is released. The released energy can be utilized to generate electricity in a nuclear reactor.

Working of a nuclear reactor:

  • In a nuclear reactor, U235 or U239, a fissionable material is stacked with heavy water (D2O deuterium oxide) or graphite called moderator.
  • The neutrons produced in the fission pass through the moderator and lose a part of their energy. The slow neutrons produced during the process are captured which initiate new fission.
  • Cadmium rods are inserted in the moderator as they have ability to absorb neutrons. This controls the rate of chain reaction.
  • The energy released during the reaction appears as heat and removed by circulating a liquid (coolant). The coolant which has absorbed excess of heat from the reactor is passed over a heat exchanger for producing steam.
  • Steam is then passed through the turbines to produce electricity. Thus, the atomic energy produced with the use of fission reaction can be controlled in the nuclear reactor.
  • This process can be explored for peaceful purpose such as conversion of atomic energy into electrical energy which can be used for civilian purposes, ships, submarines, etc.

Note: Schematic diagram of nuclear power plant:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 22

Question 73.
Why cadmium rods are used in nuclear reactor?
Answer:
Cadmium rods are inserted in the moderator as they have ability to absorb neutrons which help to control the rate of chain reaction.

Question 74.
Why short-lived isotopes are used for diagnostic purposes?
Answer:
For diagnostic purpose, short-lived isotopes are used in order to limit the exposure time to radiation. Note: Diagnostic Radioisotopes are listed below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 23

Question 75.
Give one application of therapeutic radioisotopes.
Answer:
Therapeutic radioisotopes are used to destroy abnormal cell growth in the body, e.g. cancerous cells.
Note: Therapeutic Radioisotopes are listed below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 24

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

Question 76.
Give example of isotopes used in following.
i. Isotope used in the treatment of leukaemia.
ii. Isotopes used in the preservation of agricultural products by irradiation.
Answer:
i. Isotope of phosphorus, \({ }_{15}^{35} \mathrm{P}\).
ii. 60Co or 137Cs

Question 77.
At which places has BARC Mumbai set up irradiation plants for preservation of agricultural produce?
Answer:
Bhabha Atomic Research Centre (BARC) Mumbai has set up irradiation plants for preservation of agricultural produce such as mangoes, onion and potatoes at Vashi (Navi Mumbai) and Lasalgaon (Nashik).

Question 78.
Why radiotracer technique is used in chemistry?
Answer:
Radiotracer technique is used to trace the path/mechanism followed by a reaction in the system.

Question 79.
The half-life for radioactive decay of an element X is 140 days. Complete the following flow chart showing decay of 1 g of X.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 25
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 26
Shortcut method:
Amount of the element X left after n half-lives is given as [X] = \(\frac{[\mathrm{X}]_{0}}{2^{n}}\)
e.g. \(\frac{1}{2^{4}} \mathrm{~g}=\frac{1}{16} \mathrm{~g}\)

Question 80.
A sample of 35S complete its 10% decay in 20 min, then calculate the time required to complete decay by 19%.
Answer:
When decay is 10 % complete, if N0 = 100 , then N = 100 – 10 = 90 and t = 20 minutes
When decay is 19 % complete, N = 100 – 19 = 81
Substituting these values in formula we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity 27

Multiple Choice Questions

1. Radius of the nucleus is related to the mass number A by ………….
(A) R = R0A1/2
(B) R = R0A
(C) R = R0A2
(D) R = R0A1/3
Answer:
(D) R = R0A1/3

2. Which of the following nuclides has the magic number of both protons and neutrons?
(A) \({ }_{50}^{115} \mathrm{Sn}\)
(B) \({ }_{81}^{206} \mathrm{Pb}\)
(C) \({ }_{82}^{208} \mathrm{Pb}\)
(D) \({ }_{50}^{118} \mathrm{Pb}\)
Answer:
(C) \({ }_{82}^{208} \mathrm{Pb}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

3. The probability of decay of a radioactive element depends on …………..
i. the age of nucleus
ii. the presence of catalyst
iii. pressure
iv. temperature
(A) only i. and iv
(B) all of these
(C) only ii. And iii.
(D) none of these
Answer:
(D) none of these

4. The decay constant for 67Ga is 7.0 × 10-4 s-1. If initial concentration of is 0.07 g, what is the half-life of 67Ga?
(A) 990 s
(B) 79.2 s
(C) 12375 s
(D) 10.10 × 10-4 s
Answer:
(A) 990 s

5. The half-life of radioactive element X having decay constant of 1.7 × 10-5 s-1 is …………
(A) 21.5 h
(B) 19.7 h
(C) 11.3 h
(D) 2.8 h
Answer:
(C) 11.3 h

6. A radioactive decay of element X (Z = 90) is 30 % complete in 30 minutes. It has a half-life period of ……………
(A) 24.3 min
(B) 58.3 min
(C) 102.3 min
(D) 120.3 min
Answer:
(B) 58.3 min

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 13 Nuclear Chemistry and Radioactivity

7. The half-life of radium is 1600 years. The fraction of a sample of radium that would remain after 6400 year is ……….
(A) \(\frac {1}{2}\)
(B) \(\frac {1}{4}\)
(C) \(\frac {1}{8}\)
(D) \(\frac {1}{16}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac {1}{16}\)

8. The half-life of an element is 5 d. How much time is required for the decay of 7/8th of the sample?
(A) 5 d
(B) 10 d
(C) 15 d
(D) 35/8 d
Answer:
(C) 15 d

9. The composition of an α-particle can be expressed as ……………….
(A) 1p + 1n
(B) 1p + 2n
(C) 2p + 1n
(D) 2p + 2n
Answer:
(D) 2p + 2n

10. If a radioactive nuclide of group 15 element undergoes β-particle emission, the daughter element will be found in ………………..
(A) 16 group
(B) 14 group
(C) 13 group
(D) same group
Answer:
(A) 16 group

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15 Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 1.
What are p-block elements?
Answer:

  • Elements in which the differentiating electron (the last filling electron) enters the outermost p orbital are p-block elements.
  • Since maximum six electrons can be accommodated in p-subshell i.e., three p-orbitals, the p-block contains six groups numbered from 13 to 18 in the modem periodic table.
  • The p-block elements show greater variation in the properties than s-block elements.

Question 2.
Write the names of the elements present in groups 13, 14 and 15.
Answer:

Group Name of family Name of the elements
13 Boron family Boron (5B), aluminium (13Al), gallium (31Ga), indium (49In), thallium (81Tl)
14 Carbon family Carbon (6C), silicon (14Si), germanium (32Ge), tin (50Sn), lead (82Pb)
15 Nitrogen family Nitrogen (7N), phosphorus (15P), arsenic (33AS), antimony (51Sb), bismuth (83Bi)

Question 3.
i. Write the general outer electronic configuration of the elements of group 13, group 14 and group 15.
ii. By how many electrons do their outer electronic configurations differ from their nearest inert gas?
Answer:
i.

Group General outer electronic configuration
13 ns2 np1
14 ns2 np2
15 ns2 np3

ii. The outer electronic configurations of the elements group 13, group 14 and group 15 differ from their nearest inert gas by 5, 4 and 3 electrons, respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 4.
In which form do the elements of groups 13,14 and 15 occur in nature?
Answer:

  • The elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 do not occur in free monoatomic state and are found as compounds with other elements.
  • They also occur in the form of polyatomic molecules (such as N2, P4, C60) or polyatomic covalent arrays (such as graphite, diamond).

Question 5.
Write condensed electronic configurations of the following elements.
13Al, 49In, 14Si, 50Sn, 15P, 33As
Answer:
Condensed electronic configurations of
i. 13Al: [Ne]3s2 3p1
ii. 49In: [Kr]4d105s25p1
iii. 14Si: [Ne]3s23p2
iv. 50Sn: [Kr]4d105s25p2
v. 15P: [Ne]3s23p3
vi. 33As: [Ar]3d104s24p3

Note: Condensed electronic configurations of elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 are given in the table below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 1

Question 6.
Name the following.
i. A metalloid present in group 13.
ii. A group 13 element which is the third most abundant element in the earth’s crust.
Answer:
i. Boron
ii. Aluminium

Question 7.
Why boron is classified as a metalloid?
Answer:
Boron is glossy and hard solid like metals but a poor conductor of electricity like nonmetals. Since it exhibits properties of both metals and nonmetals, boron is classified as a metalloid.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 8.
Describe the variation in the electronegativity of group 13 elements.
Answer:

  • In group 13, on moving down the group, the electronegativity decreases from B to Al.
  • However, there is a marginal increase in the electronegativity from Al to Tl.
  • This trend is a result of the irregularities observed in atomic size of elements.

Question 9.
Atomic numbers of the group 13 elements are in the order B < Al < Ga < In < Tl. Arrange these elements in increasing order of ionic radii of M3+.
Answer:

  • The given elements are in an increasing order of their atomic number.
  • The general outer electronic configuration of group 13 elements is ns2np1.
  • M3+ ion is formed by the removal of three electrons from the outermost shell ‘n’.
  • In the M3+ ions, the ‘n-1’ shell becomes the outermost shell. Size of the ‘n-1’ shell increases down the group.

Therefore, the ionic radii of M3+ ion increases down the group in the following order:
B3+ < Al3+ < Ga3+ < In3+ < Tl3+

Question 10.
Why the atomic radius of Gallium is less than that of aluminium?
Answer:

  • Atomic radius of the elements increases down the group due to addition of new shells.
  • Electronic configuration of Al is [Ne]3s23p1 while that of Ga is [Ar]3d104s24p1.
  • As Al does not have d-electrons, it offers an exception to this trend.
  • As we go from Al down to Ga the nuclear charge increases by 18 units. Out of the 18 electrons added, 10 electrons are in the inner 3d subshell of Ga. These d-electrons offer poor shielding effect.
  • Therefore, the effect of attraction due to increased nuclear charge is experienced prominently by the outer electrons of Ga and thus, its atomic radius becomes smaller than that of Al.

Hence, the atomic radius of gallium is less than that of aluminium.

Question 11.
The values of the first ionization enthalpy of Al, Si and P are 577, 786 and 1012 kJ mol-1 respectively. Explain the observed trend.
Answer:

  • The trend shows increasing first ionization enthalpy from Al to Si to P.
  • Al, Si and P belong to the third period in the periodic table and hence, they have same valence shell.
  • As we move across a period from left to right, the nuclear charge increases. Due to this, electrons in the valence shell are held more tightly by the nucleus as we go from Al to Si to P.
  • Therefore, more energy is required to remove an electron from its outermost shell.

Hence, the value of first ionization enthalpy increases from Al to Si to P.

Note: Atomic and physical properties of group 13 elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 12.
Name metal(s), nonmetal(s) and metalloid(s) of group 14.
Answer:
i. Metal: Tin, lead
ii. Nonmetal: Carbon
iii. Metalloid: Silicon, germanium

Question 13.
Explain the variation in the following properties of the group 14 elements,
i. Atomic radii
ii. Ionization enthalpy
iii. Electronegativity
Answer:
i. Atomic radii (Covalent radii):

  • In the periodic table as we move down the group 14 from C to Pb, the atomic radii increases due to the addition of new shell at each succeeding element.
  • However, the increase is comparatively less after silicon due to poor shielding by inner d- and f-electrons in the atoms.

ii. Ionization enthalpy:

  • Due to increased effective nuclear charge, group 14 elements have higher value of ionization enthalpy than corresponding group 13 elements.
  • In the periodic table, as we move down the group 14 from C to Sn, the ionization enthalpy decreases.
  • From Si to Sn, the ionization enthalpy decreases slightly.
  • However, from Sn to Pb, the ionization enthalpy increases slightly. It is due to the poor shielding effect of intervening d and f orbitals and increase in the size of the atoms.

iii. Electronegativity:

  • Due to small atomic size, group 14 elements are slightly more electronegative than the corresponding group 13 elements.
  • As we move down the group 14 from C to Si in the periodic table, the electronegativity decreases.
  • The electronegativity values for elements from Si to Pb are almost the same.
  • Among group 14 elements, carbon is the most electronegative with electronegativity of 2.5.

Question 14.
Explain why there is a phenomenal decrease in ionization enthalpy from carbon to silicon.
Answer:

  • Carbon is the first element of group 14 and thus, it has the smallest atomic size.
  • The ionization enthalpy of carbon (1086 kJ mol-1) is very high due to its small atomic size (77 pm) and high electronegativity (2.5).
  • However, the ionization enthalpy of silicon (786 kJ mol-1) decreases phenomenally due to the increase in its atomic size (118 pm) and low electronegativity (1.8).

Note: Atomic and physical properties of group 14 elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 3

Question 15.
Which type of elements are present in group 15? Mention their physical state.
Answer:

  • Group 15 includes all the three traditional types of elements i.e., metals, nonmetals and metalloids.
  • Nitrogen is a gas whereas the remaining group 15 elements are solids.
  • The gaseous nitrogen and brittle phosphorus are nonmetals.
  • Arsenic and antimony are metalloids while bismuth is moderately reactive metal.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 16.
Explain the trends in physical properties of group 15 elements.
i. Atomic and ionic radii
ii. Ionization enthalpy
iii. Electronegativity
Answer:
i. Atomic and ionic radii:

  • Atomic size increases down the group with increasing atomic number.
  • The effective nuclear charge in case of group 15 elements is larger than that of group 14 elements. Due to the increased effective nuclear charge, electrons are strongly attracted by the nucleus. Thus, the atomic and ionic radii of group 15 elements are smaller than the atomic and ionic radii of the corresponding group 14 elements.
  • On moving down the group, number of shells increases which leads to increased shielding effect and as a result atomic radii and ionic radii increases.

ii. Ionization enthalpy:

  • Due to extra stability of half-filled p-orbitals and relatively smaller size of group 15 elements, ionization enthalpy of group 15 elements is much greater than that of the group 14 elements in the corresponding periods.
  • On moving down the group, increase in atomic size and screening effect overcome the effective nuclear charge and thus, ionization enthalpy decreases.

iii. Electronegativity:

  • Due to smaller size and greater effective nuclear charge of atoms, group 15 elements have higher electronegativity values than group 14 elements.
  • On moving down the group, electronegativity values decreases due to increase in the size of the atoms and shielding effect.
  • Nitrogen is the most electronegative element among group 15 elements. However, there is not much of a difference between the electronegativity values of other elements of group 15.

Note: Atomic and physical properties of group 15 elements.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 4

Question 17.
Write a note on the oxidation state of p-block elements with respect to groups 13, 14 and 15 elements.
Answer:

  • Oxidation state is the primary chemical property of all elements.
  • The highest oxidation state exhibited by the p-block elements is equal to the total number of valence electrons i.e., the sum of s- and p-electrons present in the valence shell. This is sometimes called the group oxidation state.
  • In boron, carbon and nitrogen families, the group oxidation state is the most stable oxidation state for the lighter elements.
  • Besides, the elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 exhibit other oxidation states which are lower than the group oxidation state by two units.
  • The lower oxidation states become increasingly stable as we move down to heavier elements in the groups.

Note: Group oxidation states and common oxidation states with examples for groups 13, 14 and 15.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 5

Question 18.
What are general oxidation states of group 13 elements? Explain.
Answer:

  • The general oxidation states of group 13 are +1 and +3.
  • The group 13 elements have the outermost electronic configuration ns2 np1.
  • If only np1 electron takes part in bonding, the oxidation state is +1 and if all the three electrons i.e., ns2 np1 take part in bonding, the oxidation state is +3. Hence, the expected oxidation states are +1 and +3.

Question 19.
Give reason: The increased stability of the oxidation state is lowered by 2 units than the group oxidation state in heavier p-block elements.
Answer:

  • The increased stability of the oxidation state lowered by 2 units than the group oxidation state in heavier p-block elements is due to inert pair effect.
  • In these elements, the two s-electrons are involved less readily in chemical reactions.
  • This is because, in heavier p-block elements, the s-electrons of valence shell experience poor shielding than valence p-electrons due to ten inner d-electrons.

Hence, the increased stability of the oxidation state is lowered by 2 units than the group oxidation state in heavier p-block elements.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 20.
Why Tl1+ ion is more stable than Tl3+?
Answer:

  • Tl is a heavy element which belongs to group 13 of the p-block.
  • The common oxidation state for this group is +3.
  • In p-block, the lower oxidation state is more stable for heavier elements due to inert pair effect.

Hence, Tl1+ ion is more stable than Tl3+ ion.

Question 21.
How can you explain the higher stability of BCl3 as compared to TlCl3?
Answer:

  • Boron is a light element in group 13 and has outermost electronic configuration 2s2 2p1 whereas thallium is a heavy element in group 13 and has outermost electronic configuration 6s2 6p1.
  • Because of its small ionic radius, boron forms stable compounds in +3 oxidation state.
  • Thallium has a large atomic size and due to the inert pair effect forms more stable compounds with lower oxidation state +1 than compounds with +3 oxidation state.

Therefore, BCl3 has higher stability than TlCl3.

Question 22.
State the oxidation state for the following:
i. The group oxidation state of group 14 elements.
ii. The stable oxidation state for lead.
iii. Oxidation state of carbon in CH4.
Answer:
i. +4
ii. +2
iii. -4

Question 23.
GeCl4 is more stable than GeCl2 while PbCl2 is more stable than PbCl4. Explain.
Answer:

  • Elements Ge and Pb belong to 4th and 6th period in the group 14.
  • The group oxidation state of group 14 elements is +4.
  • However, the stability of other oxidation state which is lower by 2 units i.e., +2, increases down the group due to inert pair effect.
  • Therefore, the stability of the oxidation state +4 is more in Ge than in Pb while the stability of the oxidation state +2 is more in Pb than in Ge.

Hence, GeCl4 is more stable than GeCl2 while PbCl2 is more stable than PbCl4.

Question 24.
Name the elements of group 14 which are generally occur in +2 oxidation state.
Answer:
The elements of group 14 that are generally occur in +2 oxidation state are tin (Sn) and lead (Pb).

Question 25.
Discuss the nature of bonding in compounds of group 13, 14 and 15 elements.
Answer:

  • The lighter elements in groups 13, 14 and 15 have small atomic radii and high ionization enthalpy values. They form covalent bonds with other atoms by overlapping of valence shell orbitals.
  • As we move down the group, the value of ionization enthalpy decreases. The atomic radius increases since the valence shell orbitals are more diffused.
  • The heavier elements in these groups tend to form ionic bonds. The first member of these groups belongs to second period and do not have d orbitals and hence, B, C and N cannot expand their octet.
  • The subsequent elements in the group possess vacant d orbital in their valence shell, which can expand their octet forming a variety of compounds.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 26.
Explain the reactivity of groups 13, 14 and 15 elements towards air.
Answer:
i. Group 13 elements:
a. On heating with air or oxygen, group 13 elements form oxide of the type E2O3.
\(4 \mathrm{E}_{(\mathrm{s})}+3 \mathrm{O}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{E}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{3(\mathrm{~s})}\) (where, E = B, Al, Ga, In, Tl)

b. At high temperature, group 13 elements also react with nitrogen present in the air to form corresponding nitrides.
\(2 \mathrm{E}_{(\mathrm{s})}+\mathrm{N}_{2(\mathrm{~g})} \stackrel{\Delta}{\longrightarrow} 2 \mathrm{EN}_{(\mathrm{s})}\) (where, E = B, Al, Ga, In, Tl)

ii. Group 14 elements: The elements of group 14 on heating in air or oxygen form oxide of the type EO and EO2 in accordance with the stable oxidation state and availability of oxygen.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 6

iii. Group 15 elements: The elements of group 15 on heating in air or oxygen forms two types of oxide i.e., E2O3 and E2O5.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 7
Due to increase in metallic character down the groups 13, 14 and 15, the nature of their oxides gradually varies from acidic through amphoteric to basic.
[Note: The temperature required for the reaction of nitrogen with oxygen is very high. This is produced by striking an electric arc.]

Question 27.
Classify the following oxides into acidic, basic or amphoteric.
B2O3, Ga2O3, Tl2O3, In2O3, Al2O3
Answer:

Acidic oxide B2O3
Basic oxides In2O3, Tl2O3
Amphoteric oxides Al2O3, Ga2O3

Question 28.
Match the following.

Column A Column B
i. N2O5 a. Amphoteric
ii. Bi2O3 b. Acidic
iii. Sb2O3 c. Basic

Answer:
i – b,
ii – c,
iii – a

Note: Nature of stable oxides of groups 13, 14 and 15 elements
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 8

Question 29.
State TRUE or FALSE. Correct the false statement.
i. Sb is more stable in +3 oxidation state.
ii. Oxides of the type E2O5 are formed by group 15 elements.
iii. As4O6 is an acidic oxide.
Answer:
i. True
ii. True
iii. False
As4O6 is an amphoteric oxide.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 30.
What happens when the elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 react with water?
Answer:
i. Most of the elements of groups 13, 14 and 15 are unaffected by water.
ii. Aluminium reacts with water on heating and forms hydroxide while tin reacts with steam to form oxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 9
iii. Lead is unaffected by water due to the formation of a protective film of oxide.

Question 31.
Why is phosphorus stored under water?
Answer:
Phosphorus is highly reactive and hence, it is stored under water to prevent its reaction with air as it catches fire on being exposed to air.

Question 32.
Explain the reactivity of group 13 elements towards halogens.
Answer:
i. All the elements of group 13 react directly with halogens to form trihalides (EX3).
2E(S) + 3X2(g) → 2EX3(s) (where, E = B, Al, Ga, In and X = F, Cl, Br, I)
ii. Thallium is an exception as it forms monohalides (TlX).

Question 33.
Describe the reactivity of group 14 elements with halogens.
Answer:

  • All the elements of group 14 (except carbon) react directly with halogens to form tetrahalides (EX4).
  • The heavy elements Ge and Pb form dihalides as well.
  • Stability of dihalides increases down the group due to inert pair effect.
  • The ionic character of halides also increases steadily down the group.

Question 34.
Discuss the reactivity of group 15 elements with halogens.
Answer:

  • Elements of the group 15 reacts with halogens to form two series of halides i.e., trihalides (EX3) and pentahalides (EX5).
  • The pentahalides possess more covalent character due to availability of vacant d orbitals of the valence shell for bonding.
  • Nitrogen being second period element, does not have d orbitals in its valence shell, and therefore, does not form pentahalides.
  • Trihalides of the group 15 elements are predominantly covalent except BiF3. The only stable trihalide of nitrogen is NF3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 35.
Nitrogen does not form pentahalides. Give reason.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 7N is 1s2 2s2 2p3. It has 3 unpaired electrons which can form 3 covalent bonds, thus forming NX3 molecule.
  • Valence shell of nitrogen (n = 2) contains only s and p orbitals.
  • Thus, due to the absence of d orbitals in the valence shell, nitrogen cannot expand its octet, therefore, it cannot form compounds like NCl5 and NF5.

Hence, nitrogen does not form pentahalides.

Question 36.
Nitrogen does not form NCl5 or NF5 but phosphorus can. Explain.
Answer:

  • The electronic configuration of 7N is 1s2 2s2 2p3 while that of 15P is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p3.
  • As phosphorus contains d orbitals, it can expand its octet to form MX3 as well MX5 compounds.
  • However, due to absence of d orbitals, nitrogen cannot form MX3 or MX5.

Hence, Nitrogen does not form NCl5 or NF5 but phosphoms can form compounds like PCl5 or PF5.

Question 37.
Define catenation.
Answer:
The property of self-linking of atoms of an element by covalent bonds to form chains and rings is called catenation.

Question 38.
Explain catenation of group 14 elements.
Answer:
i. The property of self-linking of atoms of an element by covalent bonds to form chains and rings is called catenation.
ii. The strength of the element-element bond determines the tendency of an element to form a chain.
iii. Among the elements of group 14, the bond strength is maximum for C-C bond (348 kJ mol-1). Hence, carbon has maximum tendency for catenation.

Bond Bond strength (Bond enthalpy kJ mol-1)
C-C 348
Si-Si 297
Ge-Ge 260
Sn-Sn 240

iv. From the values of bond enthalpy, it can be concluded that the tendency to form chains is maximum for carbon and much lesser for silicon. Germanium has still lesser tendency and tin has hardly any tendency for catenation. Lead does not show catenation.
Therefore, the order of catenation of group 14 elements is C >> Si > Ge = Sn.

Question 39.
State TRUE or FALSE. Correct the false statement.
i. Among the group 14 elements, Ge does not show the property of catenation.
Answer:
i. False
Among the group 14 elements, Pb (lead) does not shows the property of catenation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 40.
Define allotropy.
Answer:
When a solid element exists in different crystalline forms with different physical properties such as colour, density, melting point, etc. the phenomenon is called allotropy.

Question 41.
i. What are allotropes?
ii. Name various allotropes of carbon.
Answer:
i. When a solid element exists in different crystalline forms with different physical properties such as colour, density, melting point, etc. the phenomenon is called allotropy and the individual crystalline forms are called allotropes.
ii. Diamond, graphite, fiillerenes, graphene and carbon nanotubes are various allotropes of carbon.

Question 42.
Explain the structure of diamond.
Answer:
Structure of diamond:

  • In diamond, each carbon atom undergoes sp3 hybridization and is linked to four other carbon atoms in tetrahedral manner.
  • The C – C bond length is 154 pm.
  • The tetrahedra are linked together forming a three-dimensional network structure involving strong C-C single bonds which makes diamond the hardest natural substance.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 10

Question 43.
Write physical properties of diamond. Also, state its uses.
Answer:
i. Physical properties

  • Diamond is the hardest natural substance.
  • It has abnormally high melting point (3930 °C).
  • It is a bad conductor of electricity.

ii. Uses: Diamond is used

  • for cutting glass and in drilling tools.
  • for making dies for drawing thin wire from metal.
  • for making jewellery.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 44.
Describe the structure of graphite.
Answer:

  • Graphite is composed of layers of two-dimensional sheets of carbon atoms.
  • Each sheet is made up of hexagonal net of sp2 carbons bonded to three neighbours forming three bonds.
  • The fourth electron in the unhybrid p-orbital of each carbon is shared by all carbon atoms resulting in a π bond. These it electrons are delocalized over the whole layer.
  • The C – C bond length in graphite is 141.5 pm.
  • The individual layers are held by weak van der Waals forces and separated by 335 pm.
  • Graphite is soft and slippery and is thermodynamically most stable allotrope of carbon.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 11

Question 45.
Diamond is very hard whereas graphite is soft. Explain.
Answer:

  • Diamond has three-dimensional network of sp3 hybridized carbon atoms joined by extended covalent bonds which are difficult to break. Therefore, diamond is hard.
  • Graphite has two-dimensional sheet like structure, like layers of hexagonal rings formed from sp2 hybridized carbon atoms. These layers are held by weak van der Waals forces, which can be broken easily. Therefore, graphite is soft and slippery.

Hence, diamond is very hard whereas graphite is soft.

Question 46.
i. What are fullerenes?
ii. How are they prepared?
Answer:
i. Fullerenes are allotropes of carbon in which carbon molecules are linked by a definite numbers of carbon atoms, for example as in C60.
ii. Fullerenes are produced when an electric arc is struck between the graphite electrodes in an inert atmosphere of argon or helium. The soot formed contains significant amount of C60 fullerene and smaller amounts of other fullerenes C32, C50, C70 and C84.

Question 47.
Discuss the structure and properties of fullerene (C6o).
Answer:

  • C60 has a shape like soccer ball and called Buckminsterfullerene or bucky ball.
  • It contains 20 hexagonal and 12 pentagonal fused rings of carbon.
  • The C60 fullerene structure exhibit separations between the neighbouring carbons as 143.5 pm and 138.3 pm.
  • Fullerenes are covalent and soluble in organic solvents.
  • Fullerene C60 reacts with group 1 metals forming solids such as K3C60.
  • The compound K3C60 behaves as a superconductor below 18 K, which means that its carries electric current with zero resistance.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 12

Question 48.
Explain the structure of carbon nanotubes.
Answer:

  • Carbon nanotubes are cylindrical in shape consisting of rolled-up graphite sheet.
  • Nanotubes can be single-walled (SWNTs) with a diameter of less than 1 nm or multi-walled (MWNTs) with diameter reaching more than 100 nm.
  • Their lengths range from several micrometres to millimetres.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 49.
Describe the properties of carbon nanotubes.
Answer:

  • Carbon nanotubes are robust. They can be bent, and when released, they will spring back to the original shape.
  • Carbon nanotubes have high electrical or heat conductivities and highest strength-to-weight ratio for any known material to date.
  • The researchers of NASA are combining carbon nanotubes with other materials into composites that can be used to build lightweight spacecraft.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 13

Question 50.
What is graphene?
Answer:

  • Isolated layer of graphite is called graphene.
  • Graphene sheet is a two dimensional solid.
  • It has unique electronic properties.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 14

Question 51.
Explain the structure of various allotropes of phosphorus.
Answer:
Phosphorus is found in different allotropic forms. White and red phosphorus are important allotropes of phosphorus.
i. White (yellow) phosphorus:

  1. White (yellow) phosphorus consists of discrete tetrahedral P4 molecules.
  2. The P – P – P bond angle is 60°.
  3. White phosphorus is less stable and hence more reactive, because of angular strain in the P4 molecule.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 15

ii. Red phosphorus:

  • Red phosphorus consists of chains of P4 linked together by covalent bonds.
  • Thus, it is polymeric in nature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 16

Question 52.
Enlist properties of
i. white phosphorus.
ii. red phosphorus.
Answer:
i. Properties of white phosphorus:

  • It is translucent white waxy solid.
  • It glows in the dark (chemiluminescence).
  • It is insoluble in water but dissolves in boiling NaOH solution.
  • It is poisonous.

ii. Properties of red phosphorus:

  • It is stable and less reactive.
  • It is odourless and possess iron grey lustre.
  • It does not glow in the dark.
  • It is insoluble in water.
  • It is nonpoisonous.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 53.
How is red phosphorus prepared?
Answer:
Red phosphorus is prepared by heating white phosphorus at 573 K in an inert atmosphere.

Question 54.
State whether the following statement is TRUE or FALSE. Correct if false.
i. Covalent molecules have irregular shape described with the help of bond lengths and bond angles.
ii. It is difficult to understand the reactivity of covalent inorganic compounds from their structures.
iii. Inorganic molecules are often represented by molecular formulae indicating their elemental composition.
Answer:
i. False
Covalent molecules have definite shape described with the help of bond lengths and bond angles.
ii. False
The reactivity of covalent inorganic compounds is better understood from their structures.
iii. True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 55.
Describe structure of the following molecules.
i. Boron trichloride
ii. Aluminium chloride
iii. Orthoboric acid
Answer:
i. Structure of boron trichloride (BCl3) molecule:

  • Boron trichloride (BCl3) is a covalent compound.
  • In BCl3 molecule, boron atom is sp2 hybridized having one vacant unhybridized p orbital.
  • B in BCl3 has incomplete octet.
  • BCl3 is a nonpolar trigonal planar molecule.
  • Each Cl – B – Cl bond angle is 120°.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 17

ii. Structure of aluminium chloride (AlCl3) molecule:

  • Aluminium atom in aluminium chloride is sp2 hybridized, with one vacant unhybrid p-orbital.
  • Aluminium chloride exists as the dimer (Al2Cl6) formed by overlap of vacant 3d orbital of Al with a lone pair of electrons of Cl.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 18

iii. Structure of orthoboric or boric acid (H3BO3) molecule:

  • Orthoboric acid has central boron atom bound to three -OH groups.
  • The solid orthoboric acid has layered crystal structure in which trigonal planar B(OH)3 units are joined together by hydrogen bonds.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 19

Question 56.
Which are the different crystalline forms of silica?
Answer:
Quartz, cristobalite and tridymite are the different crystalline forms of silica.
[Note: These crystalline forms are inter-convertible at a suitable temperature.]

Question 57.
Explain the structure of silicon dioxide.
Answer:

  • Silicon dioxide (SiO2), is also known as silica.
  • It is a covalent three-dimensional network solid.
  • In SiO2, each silicon atom is covalently bound in tetrahedral manner to four oxygen atoms.
  • The crystal contains eight membered rings having alternate silicon and oxygen atoms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 20

Question 58.
Discuss the nature and structure of the following compounds.
i. Nitric acid
ii. Phosphoric acid
Answer:
i. Nitric acid:

  • Nitric acid (HNO3) is a strong, oxidizing mineral acid.
  • The central nitrogen atom is sp2 hybridized.
  • HNO3 exhibits resonance phenomenon.
  • Figure (a) represents resonating structures of HNO3 while figure (b) represents resonance hybrid of HNO3.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 21

ii. Phosphoric acid (Orthophosphoric acid):

  • Phosphorus forms number of oxyacids. Orthophosphoric acid (H3PO4) is a strong nontoxic mineral acid.
  • It contains three ionizable acidic hydrogens.
  • The central phosphorus atom is tetrahedral.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 22

Question 59.
Give the molecular formula of crystalline borax.
Answer:
The crystalline borax has formula Na2B4O7.10H2O or Na2[B4O5(OH)4].8H2O.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 60.
How is borax obtained from its mineral colemanite?
Answer:
Borax is obtained from its mineral colemanite by boiling it with a solution of sodium carbonate.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 23

Question 61.
Why is the aqueous solution of borax alkaline?
Answer:
On hydrolysis, borax forms a strong base (NaOH) and a weak acid (H3BO3). The presence of the strong base makes borax solution alkaline.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 24

Question 62.
What happens when borax is heated strongly?
Answer:
Borax is a white crystalline solid. On heating, borax loses water molecules and swells up. On further heating, it melts and forms a transparent liquid, which solidifies into a glass like material known as borax bead.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 25

Question 63.
Explain borax bead test.
Answer:
i. Borax bead test is used to detect coloured transition metal ions.
ii. On heating, borax loses water molecules and swells up. On further heating, it melts and forms a transparent liquid, which solidifies into a glass like material known as borax bead.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 26
iii. The borax bead consists of sodium metaborate and boric anhydride, which reacts with metals salts to form coloured bead.
e.g. When borax is heated in a Bunsen burner flame with CoO on a loop of platinum wire, a blue coloured Co(BO2)2 bead is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 27

Question 64.
Write the uses of borax.
Answer:
Borax is used

  • to manufacture optical and hard borosilicate glasses.
  • as a flux for soldering and welding.
  • as a mild antiseptic in the preparation of medical soaps.
  • in qualitative analysis for borax bead test.
  • as a brightener in washing powder.

Question 65.
How are silicones prepared? Write their properties.
Answer:
i. Preparation of silicones:
a. Alkyl or aryl substituted silicon chlorides having general formula RnSiCl(4-n) (R = alkyl or aryl group) are used as the starting materials for manufacture of silicones.
b. When methyl chloride reacts with silicon in the presence of copper catalyst at a temperature 573 K, various types of methyl substituted chlorosilane of formula MeSiCl3, Me2SiCl2, Me3SiCl with small amounts of Me4Si are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 28
c. Hydrolysis of dimethyldichlorosilane, (CH3)2SiCl2 followed by condensation polymerisation yields straight chain silicone polymers.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 29

d. The chain length of polymer can be controlled by adding (CH3)3SiCl at the end.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 30

ii. Properties:

  • Silicones are water repellent.
  • They have high thermal stability.
  • They are good electrical insulators.
  • They are resistant to oxidation and chemicals.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 66.
Explain the preparation of ammonia from nitrogeneous organic matter.
Answer:
Ammonia is formed by the decomposition of nitrogeneous organic matter such as urea. It is therefore, present naturally in small quantities in air and soil.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 31

Question 67.
Describe laboratory method for preparation of ammonia.
Answer:
Ammonia is prepared on laboratory scale by decomposition of the ammonium salts with calcium hydroxide or caustic soda.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 32

Question 68.
How is ammonia manufactured by Haber process?
Answer:

  • On the large scale, ammonia is prepared by direct combination of dinitrogen and dihydrogen by Haber process.
  • In this process, dinitrogen reacts with dihydrogen under high pressure of 200 × 105 Pa (200 atm) and temperature around 700 K to produce ammonia.
    N2(g) + 2H2(g) ⇌ 2NH3(g); ΔfH° = -46.1 kJ mol-1
  • Iron oxide with trace amounts of K2O and Al2O3 is used as catalyst in Haber process.
  • High pressure favours the formation of ammonia as equilibrium is attained rapidly under these conditions.

Question 69.
State the physical properties of ammonia.
Answer:

  • Ammonia is a colourless gas with pungent odour.
  • It has freezing point of 198.4 K and boiling point of 239.7 K.
  • It is highly soluble in water.

Question 70.
What is liquor ammonia?
Answer:
The concentrated aqueous solution of ammonia (NH3) is called liquor ammonia.

Question 71.
Give reason: Ammonia has higher melting and boiling points.
Answer:

  • In solid and liquid state, NH3 molecules get associated together through hydrogen bonding.
  • As a result, extra amount of energy is required to break such intermolecular hydrogen bonds. Hence, ammonia has higher melting and boiling points.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 72.
Why is ammonia basic in aqueous solution?
Answer:
i. As ammonia is highly soluble in water, it readily forms OH ions in its aqueous solution.
\(\mathrm{NH}_{3(\mathrm{~g})}+\mathrm{H}_{2} \mathrm{O}_{(l)} \rightleftharpoons \mathrm{NH}_{4(\mathrm{aq})}^{+}+\mathrm{OH}_{(a q)}^{-}\)
ii. Thus, due to the formation of OH ions, aqueous solution of ammonia is basic in nature.

Question 73.
How does the aqueous solution of ammonia react with the following salt solutions?
i. ZnSO4
ii. FeCl3
Answer:
Aqueous solution of ammonia precipitates out as hydroxides (or hydrated oxides) of metals solutions.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 33

Question 74.
Write applications of ammonia.
Answer:
Ammonia is used in

  • manufacture of fertilizers such as urea, diammonium phosphate, ammonium nitrate, ammonium sulphate etc.
  • manufacture of some inorganic compounds like nitric acid.
  • refrigerant (liq. ammonia).
  • laboratory reagent in qualitative and quantitative analysis (aq. solution of ammonia).

Question 75.
Give reactions involved in the formation of Nessler’s reagent.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 34

Question 76.
How does ammonia react with Nessler’s reagent?
Answer:
Ammonia react with Nessler’s reagent (an alkaline solution of K2HgI4) to form a brown precipitate (Millon’s base).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 35

Question 77.
Complete and write the balanced chemical equations for:
i. Ca2B6O11 + Na2CO3
ii. CoO + B2O3
iii. AgCl + NH3
iv. ZnSO4 + 2NH4OH →
v. a. 2KI + HgCl2
b. 2KI + HgI2
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 36

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

Question 78.
Naina was preparing a compound in the laboratory. She added compound ‘A’ to (CaOH)2 solution. As a result of this, a compound ‘B’ was obtained which had a pungent smell. On adding Nessler’s reagent to the compound ‘B’, a brown precipitate of compound ‘C’ was obtained.
Write the chemical reactions involved and identify ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.
Answer:
i. When ammonium chloride is mixed with (CaOH)2 solution, ammonia is formed which has a pungent odour.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 37
ii. Ammonia react with Nessler’ s reagent (an alkaline solution of K2Hgl4) to form a brown precipitate (Millon’ s base).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15, 38

Multiple Choice Questions

1. The electronic configuration of boron family is ……………
(A) ns2 np2
(B) ns2 np5
(C) ns2 np6
(D) ns2 np1
Answer:
(D) ns2 np1

2. ………… has noble gas core plus 14 f-electrons and 10 d-electrons.
(A) Gallium
(B) Indium
(C) Thallium
(D) Boron
Answer:
(C) Thallium

3. The group 15 element having inner electronic configuration as of argon is …………..
(A) Phosphorus (Z = 15)
(B) Antimony (Z = 51)
(C) Arsenic (Z = 33)
(D) Nitrogen (Z = 7)
Answer:
(C) Arsenic (Z = 33)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

4. Which of the following is NOT a metalloid?
(A) B
(B) Sn
(C) Ge
(D) Sb
Answer:
(B) Sn

5. Among the group 13 elements, melting point is highest for …………..
(A) B
(B) Al
(C) Ga
(D) In
Answer:
(A) B

6. On moving down the group 14, the ionization enthalpy
(A) increases slightly from Si to Sn and decreases slightly from Sn to Pb
(B) increases throughout uniformly from Si to Pb
(C) decreases throughout uniformly from Si to Pb
(D) decreases slightly from Si to Sn and increases slightly from Sn to Pb
Answer:
(D) decreases slightly from Si to Sn and increases slightly from Sn to Pb

7. ………… is the most electronegative element of group 14.
(A) Carbon
(B) Silicon
(C) Germanium
(D) Tin
Answer:
(A) Carbon

8. The stability of +3 oxidation state in aqueous solution is in order ……………
(A) Al > Ga > In > Tl
(B) Tl > In > Ga > Al
(C) Al > Tl > Ga > In
(D) Tl > Al > Ga > In
Answer:
(A) Al > Ga > In > Tl

9. Group oxidation state of group 15 elements is ……………
(A) +4
(B) +1
(C) +3
(D) +5
Answer:
(D) +5

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

10. …………. cannot expand its octet due to absence of d orbital in its valence shell.
(A) Ga
(B) C
(C) As
(D) Ge
Answer:
(B) C

11. Which one of the following statements about boron and aluminium is INCORRECT?
(A) Both exhibit oxidation state of +3.
(B) Both form oxides of the formula M2O3.
(C) Both form trihalides, MX3.
(D) Both form amphoteric oxides.
Answer:
(D) Both form amphoteric oxides.

12. Which of the following is basic oxide?
(A) Bi2O3
(B) CO2
(C) B2O3
(D) SiO2
Answer:
(A) Bi2O3

13. The reaction of Al with H2O produces ……………
(A) Al2O3
(B) AlH3
(C) Al(OH)3
(D) Al2H6
Answer:
(C) Al(OH)3

14. Which of the following is a stable halide of nitrogen?
(A) NF3
(B) NCl5
(C) NF5
(D) NBr5
Answer:
(A) NF3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

15. Catenation is the ability of …………..
(A) atoms to form strong bonds with similar atoms
(B) elements to form giant molecules
(C) an element to form multiple bonds
(D) an element to form long chains of identical atoms
Answer:
(D) an element to form long chains of identical atoms

16. Among the group 13 elements, the property of allotropy is shown by ………………
(A) indium
(B) aluminium
(C) thallium
(D) boron
Answer:
(D) boron

17. Thermodynamically stable allotrope of carbon is …………..
(A) diamond
(B) graphite
(C) buckyball
(D) all of these
Answer:
(B) graphite

18. White phosphorus contains discrete …………… molecules.
(A) P5
(B) P4
(C) P6
(D) P52
Answer:
(B) P4

19. In white phosphorus, the P-P-P bond angle is ……………
(A) 60°
(B) 90°
(C) 109.5
(D) 120°
Answer:
(A) 60°

20. 3c-2e bonds are present in ………………
(A) NH3
(B) B2H6
(C) H3BO3
(D) SiCl4
Answer:
(B) B2H6

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Elements of Group 13, 14 and 15

21. Which of the following is borax?
(A) Na2B4O7.4H2O
(B) Na2B4O7.10H2O
(C) H3BO3
(D) NaBO2
Answer:
(B) Na2B4O7.10H2O

22. In Borax bead test, the coloured ions give characteristic coloured beads due to formation of …………….
(A) metal borates
(B) metal metaborates
(C) metal phosphates
(D) metal tetraborates
Answer:
(B) metal metaborates

23. The catalyst used in Haber process contains …………..
(A) nickel
(B) palladium
(C) iron
(D) platinum
Answer:
(C) iron

24. Which of the following is used as refrigerant?
(A) Nessler’s reagent
(B) Liq. ammonia
(C) Borax
(D) Diborane
Answer:
(B) Liq. ammonia